|
|
(144 intermediate revisions by the same user not shown) |
Line 1: |
Line 1: |
− | '''Scientific and Technical Reports: Preparation, Presentation, and Preservation''' (hereinafter, the ''Standard'') is the ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010) American national standard that is developed by the [[National Information Standards Organization]] and approved in 2005 and reaffirmed by 2010 by the [[American National Standards Institute]]. | + | '''Scientific and Technical Reports: Preparation, Presentation, and Preservation''' (alternatively known as [[ANSI/NISO Z39.18]]; hereinafter, the ''Standard'') is the [[ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)]] American national standard that is developed by the [[National Information Standards Organization]] and approved in 2005 and reaffirmed by 2010 by the [[American National Standards Institute]]. |
| + | |
| | | |
| ==Trivia== | | ==Trivia== |
Line 6: |
Line 7: |
| | | |
| ===Copyright=== | | ===Copyright=== |
− | :Copyright © 2010 by the National Information Standards Organization. All rights reserved under International and Pan-American Copyright Conventions. For noncommercial purposes only, this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior permission in writing from the publisher, provided it is reproduced accurately, the source of the material is identified, and the NISO copyright status is acknowledged. All inquiries regarding translations into other languages or commercial reproduction or distribution should be addressed to: NISO, 3600 Clipper Mill Road, Suite 302, Baltimore, MD 21211. | + | :Copyright © 2010 by the [[National Information Standards Organization]]. All rights reserved under International and Pan-American Copyright Conventions. For noncommercial purposes only, this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior permission in writing from the publisher, provided it is reproduced accurately, the source of the material is identified, and the NISO copyright status is acknowledged. All inquiries regarding translations into other languages or commercial reproduction or distribution should be addressed to: NISO, 3600 Clipper Mill Road, Suite 302, Baltimore, MD 21211. |
| + | |
| + | ===Appendices=== |
| + | :The appendices are not part of the ''Standard'' and included for information only. |
| + | :*Appendix A -- '''Selected Annotated Bibliography''' |
| + | :*Appendix B -- '''Glossary''' |
| + | :*Appendix C -- '''[[Dublin Core Data Elements]]''' |
| + | :*Appendix D -- '''Formats for Organizing a Scientific or Technical Report''' |
| + | :*Appendix E -- '''Report Documentation Page, Standard Form (SF)''' |
| + | :*Appendix F -- '''XML DTD and Sample XSL (Style Sheet)''' |
| + | |
| + | ==General Information== |
| | | |
| ===Role=== | | ===Role=== |
− | :The guidelines in this Standard address issues related to creating, discovering, presenting, | + | :The guidelines in the ''Standard'' address issues related to creating, discovering, presenting, publishing, disseminating, maintaining, and preserving reports. Previous editions of the ''Standard'' focused on reports printed on paper, but, with the increased availability of computers, paper is only one of the many media of publication a report can have. In addition, reports can now include digital sections as well as traditional printed text. This revised Standard attempts to accommodate the diverse forms reports can take. Report writers should refer to the many examples throughout the ''Standard'' as models to follow rather than using the ''Standard'' as a model. |
− | publishing, disseminating, maintaining, and preserving reports. Previous editions of the | |
− | standard focused on reports printed on paper, but, with the increased availability of
| |
− | computers, paper is only one of the many media of publication a report can have. In addition, | |
− | reports can now include digital sections as well as traditional printed text. This revised | |
− | Standard attempts to accommodate the diverse forms reports can take. Report writers should | |
− | refer to the many examples throughout the Standard as models to follow rather than using | |
− | the Standard as a model. | |
| | | |
| ===Scope=== | | ===Scope=== |
| + | :The ''Standard'' will guide individuals and organizations in preparing reports. It is generally couched in terms of the traditional printed report because that medium is the most concrete and common example for readers to consider and visualize. However, the ''Standard'' is expressed in such a way that adapting to other means of publication (for example, electronic formats on the Web) is recognized. |
| | | |
− | This Standard will guide individuals and organizations in preparing reports. It is generally
| + | :Although the ''Standard'' necessarily has to consider means of distribution, facilitate methods of literature control, and accommodate methods of accessibility, it is not a standard for cataloging, describing, or preserving publications. Those roles are fulfilled by other standards, such as those associated with using MARC 21 records, [[Dublin Core]], and evolving standards for persistent identification. |
− | couched in terms of the traditional printed report because that medium is the most concrete
| |
− | and common example for readers to consider and visualize. However, the Standard is
| |
− | expressed in such a way that adapting to other means of publication (for example, electronic
| |
− | formats on the Web and CD-ROMs) is recognized.
| |
− | | |
− | Although this Standard necessarily has to consider means of distribution, facilitate methods
| |
− | of literature control, and accommodate methods of accessibility, it is not a standard for | |
− | cataloging, describing, or preserving publications. Those roles are fulfilled by other standards, | |
− | such as those associated with using MARC 21 records, Dublin Core, and evolving standards | |
− | for persistent identification. | |
| | | |
| ===Audience=== | | ===Audience=== |
− | :This Standard will prove valuable to researchers, scientists, and academics to document their | + | :The ''Standard'' will prove valuable to researchers, scientists, and academics to document their research and results, provide consistent guidelines for creating reports, and assist in collaboration among organizations. Writers, editors, and publishers can use the ''Standard'' to provide consistency throughout their organizations and adopt uniform practices as needed. Information specialists in areas such as libraries, depositories, databases, and archives will find it helpful in categorizing, discovering, and maintaining information in a consistent fashion. |
− | research and results, provide consistent guidelines for creating reports, and assist in | |
− | collaboration among organizations. Writers, editors, and publishers can use the Standard to | |
− | provide consistency throughout their organizations and adopt uniform practices as needed. | |
− | Information specialists in areas such as libraries, depositories, databases, and archives will | |
− | find it helpful in categorizing, discovering, and maintaining information in a consistent fashion. | |
| | | |
| ===Best Practices=== | | ===Best Practices=== |
− | | + | :In keeping with quality standards and practices, the ''Standard'' contains examples of best practices used by authors who produce exemplary reports—that is, reports that provide information the user needs in a form and format the user can easily understand. Authors, however, must be aware that the best practices identified by the ''Standard'' are those judged to be so at the time the Committee developed it, and they should seek to identify other practices, not only within the user’s organization but also within the user’s discipline. |
− | In keeping with quality standards and practices, this Standard contains examples of best | |
− | practices used by authors who produce exemplary reports—that is, reports that provide | |
− | information the user needs in a form and format the user can easily understand. Authors, | |
− | however, must be aware that the best practices identified by this Standard are those judged | |
− | to be so at the time the Committee developed it, and they should seek to identify other | |
− | practices, not only within the user’s organization but also within the user’s discipline. | |
| | | |
| ==Key Concepts== | | ==Key Concepts== |
| ===Metadata=== | | ===Metadata=== |
− | | + | :The ''Standard'' advocates provision for the capture of appropriate metadata in report preparation. Metadata refer to information about information or, equivalently, data about data. In current practice, the term has come to mean structured information that feeds into automated processes, and this definition is currently the most useful way to think about metadata. This definition further applies whether the publication that the metadata describes is in print or electronic form. In publishing, metadata can be classified according to a variety of specific functions, such as technical metadata for technical processes, rights metadata for rights resolution, preservation metadata for digital archiving, and [[descriptive metadata]] (metadata that characterizes the [[report content|content]] itself). |
− | This Standard advocates provision for the capture of appropriate metadata in report
| |
− | preparation. Metadata refer to information about information or, equivalently, data about data. | |
− | In current practice, the term has come to mean structured information that feeds into | |
− | automated processes, and this definition is currently the most useful way to think about | |
− | metadata. This definition further applies whether the publication that the metadata describes | |
− | is in print or electronic form. In publishing, metadata can be classified according to a variety | |
− | of specific functions, such as technical metadata for technical processes, rights metadata for | |
− | rights resolution, preservation metadata for digital archiving, and descriptive metadata | |
− | (metadata that characterizes the content itself). | |
| | | |
| ===Persistence=== | | ===Persistence=== |
− | | + | :The ''Standard'' addresses the need for persistence in links that are incorporated in reports. A key component of the digital information infrastructure is a mechanism for addressing and locating digital objects on a network or in an archival system. The current addressing structure for the [[World Wide Web]] is based on the [[Uniform Resource Locator]] ([[URL]]). While the URL provides direct, efficient access, URL-only naming fails whenever the resources are moved or reorganized. The lack of persistence leads to "404" (file not found) errors, inhibiting access to information and causing problems when archiving material for long-term preservation and permanent access. These links should also be documented for accessibility in print format. |
− | This Standard addresses the need for persistence in links that are incorporated in reports. A
| |
− | key component of the digital information infrastructure is a mechanism for addressing and | |
− | locating digital objects on a network or in an archival system. The current addressing | |
− | structure for the World Wide Web is based on the Uniform Resource Locator (URL). While | |
− | the URL provides direct, efficient access, URL-only naming fails whenever the resources are | |
− | moved or reorganized. The lack of persistence leads to “404” (file not found) errors, inhibiting | |
− | access to information and causing problems when archiving material for long-term | |
− | preservation and permanent access. These links should also be documented for accessibility | |
− | in print format. | |
| | | |
| ===Interoperability=== | | ===Interoperability=== |
− | | + | :The ''Standard'' encourages the achievement of interoperability in report presentation. In paper-based publication of scientific and technical reports, interoperability, except for language differences and visual challenges, is achieved through a single publication medium. In the digital environment with its multiple types of media, even defining the concept of publishing is a challenge. Interoperability can be achieved at three levels: technical, content, and organizational. At the technical level, protocol and format should be consistent so messages can be exchanged. Content agreements cover data and metadata and include semantic agreements on interpreting messages. The organizational level of interoperability includes rules for access, for changing collections and services, payment, authentication, etc. While the URL protocol permits interoperability in addressing, it offers no interoperability regarding content. |
− | This Standard encourages the achievement of interoperability in report presentation. In
| |
− | paper-based publication of scientific and technical reports, interoperability, except for | |
− | language differences and visual challenges, is achieved through a single publication medium. | |
− | In the digital environment with its multiple types of media, even defining the concept of | |
− | publishing is a challenge. Interoperability can be achieved at three levels: technical, content, | |
− | and organizational. At the technical level, protocol and format should be consistent so | |
− | messages can be exchanged. Content agreements cover data and metadata and include | |
− | semantic agreements on interpreting messages. The organizational level of interoperability | |
− | includes rules for access, for changing collections and services, payment, authentication, etc. | |
− | While the URL protocol permits interoperability in addressing, it offers no interoperability | |
− | regarding content. | |
| | | |
| ===Creation=== | | ===Creation=== |
− | | + | :The ''Standard'' recognizes that certain critical actions must be taken at the time a report is created. The initial stage of creating a report should include a thorough review of intellectual property rights, security issues, ease of repurposing the information, and consistent guidelines for software and file naming conventions. Given the collaborative nature of many reports, copyright should be established at the outset, and permission for using pre-existing material should be consistent with U.S. Copyright Office regulations. Potentially classified material may require authentication for release to a limited audience. If the report is best served by being released through multiple channels and repurposed into multiple formats (for example, print and Web) or parsed for repurposing in other collaborative projects, production should include standards for coding the information for such use. Creators should capture metadata tied to producing the report, such as platform, operating system, software version, and consistent file-naming conventions and extensions when they create the report. |
− | This Standard recognizes that certain critical actions must be taken at the time a report is
| |
− | created. The initial stage of creating a report should include a thorough review of intellectual | |
− | property rights, security issues, ease of repurposing the information, and consistent | |
− | guidelines for software and file naming conventions. Given the collaborative nature of many | |
− | reports, copyright should be established at the outset, and permission for using pre-existing | |
− | material should be consistent with U.S. Copyright Office regulations. Potentially classified material may require authentication for release to a limited audience. If the report is best | |
− | served by being released through multiple channels and repurposed into multiple formats (for | |
− | example, print and Web) or parsed for repurposing in other collaborative projects, production | |
− | should include standards for coding the information for such use. Creators should capture | |
− | metadata tied to producing the report, such as platform, operating system, software version, | |
− | and consistent file-naming conventions and extensions when they create the report. | |
| | | |
| ===Discovery=== | | ===Discovery=== |
| + | :The ''Standard'' emphasizes the importance of ensuring that reports will be discovered. Traditionally, the ability for the target audience to find and use scientific and technical reports produced solely in print format depended on governmental and commercial bibliographic databases or specific, specialized knowledge of primary resource producers. Reports produced in digital format should also enable discovery and access through the incorporation of appropriate associated metadata. Producers of reports should ensure that the report production workflow provides for metadata capture. Discovery is also enhanced by populating metadata with published, controlled vocabularies rather than ad hoc terminology for subjects. |
| | | |
− | This Standard emphasizes the importance of ensuring that reports will be discovered.
| + | :Another discovery issue in a digital environment is the ability of a report to allow access to all potential audiences, including those with physical restrictions. A 1998 amendment to the Rehabilitation Act (29 U.S.C. 794d), popularly referred to as “Section 508,” requires U.S. Federal agencies to make their electronic and information technology accessible to people with disabilities. Other producers of scientific and technical reports should follow guidelines provided for this requirement for greatest accessibility. A further limit to access to be avoided is using proprietary software not commonly used by the primary target audience. |
− | Traditionally, the ability for the target audience to find and use scientific and technical reports
| |
− | produced solely in print format depended on governmental and commercial bibliographic
| |
− | databases or specific, specialized knowledge of primary resource producers. Reports
| |
− | produced in digital format should also enable discovery and access through the incorporation
| |
− | of appropriate associated metadata. Producers of reports should ensure that the report
| |
− | production workflow provides for metadata capture. Discovery is also enhanced by populating
| |
− | metadata with published, controlled vocabularies rather than ad hoc terminology for subjects.
| |
− | | |
− | Another discovery issue in a digital environment is the ability of a report to allow access to all | |
− | potential audiences, including those with physical restrictions. A 1998 amendment to the | |
− | Rehabilitation Act (29 U.S.C. 794d), popularly referred to as “Section 508,” requires U.S. | |
− | Federal agencies to make their electronic and information technology accessible to people | |
− | with disabilities. Other producers of scientific and technical reports should follow guidelines | |
− | provided for this requirement for greatest accessibility. A further limit to access to be avoided | |
− | is using proprietary software not commonly used by the primary target audience. | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 3.6 Presentation in Digital Format
| |
− | | |
− | This Standard recommends that reports in digital form be presented in a structured way.
| |
− | Some methods for structured representation of reports in digital form are the DTD, XML, and
| |
− | XSL. The DTD defines the format that reports should follow; XML maintains the report’s
| |
− | contents and structures; and XSL defines how to represent the report for different vehicles of
| |
− | display (e.g. desktop computer or PDA). Two main advantages of this approach are its
| |
− | automatic validation and its flexibility of representation. Also, the XML format is widely used
| |
− | and can be easily processed by computer programs. Figure 1 shows the relationship
| |
− | between an XML document, the DTD, and XSL.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Validation
| |
| | | |
| + | ===Presentation in Digital Format=== |
| + | :The ''Standard'' recommends that reports in digital form be presented in a structured way. Some methods for structured representation of reports in digital form are the DTD, XML, and XSL. The DTD defines the format that reports should follow; XML maintains the report's contents and structures; and XSL defines how to represent the report for different vehicles of display (e.g. desktop computer or PDA). Two main advantages of this approach are its automatic validation and its flexibility of representation. Also, the XML format is widely used and can be easily processed by computer programs. |
| | | |
− | ►
| + | :;Document Type Definition (DTD) |
− | | + | ::A DTD defines the building blocks of a document using extensible Markup Language (XML). XML improves the functionality of the Web by providing more flexible and adaptable information identification, delivery, and presentation. |
− | | + | :;XML Document |
− | >
| + | ::The XML document contains the report with its metadata. Elements in an XML document should comply with the DTD provided (see Appendix F), which validates the document. |
− | | + | :;XSL (Style Sheet) |
− | | + | ::The XSL (extensible Style Sheet) provides a mechanism for presenting data available in an XML document. It provides formatting information and ordering of presentation (not always the same order as in the XML document) and can generate extra metadata, such as a [[table of contents]], [[content aid|list of figures]], etc. Multiple XSL sheets can be used for the same document to accommodate the needs of various communities: Web publication of reports, printed reports, etc. |
− | Z39.18 compliance is
| |
− | assured
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Formatted Report
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Figure 1: Components used in digital format representation
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 5
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 3.6.1 Document Type Definition (DTD)
| |
− | | |
− | A DTD defines the building blocks of a document using extensible Markup Language (XML). | |
− | XML improves the functionality of the Web by providing more flexible and adaptable | |
− | information identification, delivery, and presentation. | |
− | | |
− | 3.6.2 XML Document
| |
− | | |
− | The XML document contains the report with its metadata. Elements in an XML document | |
− | should comply with the DTD provided (see Appendix F), which validates the document. | |
− | | |
− | 3.6.3 XSL (Style Sheet)
| |
− | | |
− | The XSL (extensible Style Sheet) provides a mechanism for presenting data available in an | |
− | XML document. It provides formatting information and ordering of presentation (not always | |
− | the same order as in the XML document) and can generate extra metadata, such as a table | |
− | of contents, list of figures, etc. Multiple XSL sheets can be used for the same document to | |
− | accommodate the needs of various communities: Web publication of reports, printed reports, | |
− | etc. | |
− | | |
| | | |
| ===Presentation=== | | ===Presentation=== |
| + | :The ''Standard'' is cognizant of and reflects the requirements and limitations of different methods of publication. The concept of publication (literally, to make known to the public) changed drastically in the 1960s when computers were applied to the typesetting process. Suddenly, machine-readable electronic records were being produced along with traditional print. The subsequent development of new media, recording devices, codes of expression, and means of transmission made these electronic records eminently usable. Scientific, business, military, and government communities found these new media to be a convenient and economical means for distributing and storing information, including reports. As a result, we now see diverse ways of publishing data and information, from printed pages to files accessible over the [[World Wide Web]]. |
| | | |
− | This Standard is cognizant of and reflects the requirements and limitations of different
| + | :The prescriptions of the ''Standard'' are flexible enough to be adapted to a great variety of publication methods, both extant and yet to be discovered. However, it also recognizes that many users of a report find a printed version more convenient, portable, or permanent. Therefore, the ''Standard'' states that electronic publications be formatted so that standardized, usable print copies can be produced from any medium through common or specialized software. The ''Standard'' suggests producing reports that can be converted from medium to medium and format to format to allow ease of use and future migration. |
− | methods of publication. The concept of publication (literally, to make known to the public)
| |
− | changed drastically in the 1960s when computers were applied to the typesetting process.
| |
− | Suddenly, machine-readable electronic records were being produced along with traditional
| |
− | print. The subsequent development of new media, recording devices, codes of expression,
| |
− | and means of transmission made these electronic records eminently usable. Scientific,
| |
− | business, military, and government communities found these new media to be a convenient
| |
− | and economical means for distributing and storing information, including reports. As a result,
| |
− | we now see diverse ways of publishing data and information, from printed pages to CDs to
| |
− | analog and digital tapes to files accessible over the World Wide Web.
| |
− | | |
− | The prescriptions of this Standard are flexible enough to be adapted to a great variety of
| |
− | publication methods, both extant and yet to be discovered. However, it also recognizes that | |
− | many users of a report find a printed version more convenient, portable, or permanent. | |
− | Therefore, the Standard states that electronic publications be formatted so that standardized, | |
− | usable print copies can be produced from any medium through common or specialized | |
− | software. The Standard suggests producing reports that can be converted from medium to | |
− | medium and format to format to allow ease of use and future migration. | |
| | | |
| ===Dissemination=== | | ===Dissemination=== |
− | | + | :The ''Standard'' encourages the effective dissemination of reports. It is important that scientific and technical reports be readily available to as broad an audience as allowed to facilitate research and to promote general education goals. Online access to information opens new arenas to find reports. Reports that can be easily identified and ordered by libraries and the general public through a variety of distribution channels (for example, wholesalers, library jobbers, and online retailers) support the sustainability of the information. Archiving reports on the Web with a unique identifier, and with an agency that can support their presence over time, improves their long-term value. Therefore, creators of reports should envision a dissemination strategy at the outset of the project. |
− | This Standard encourages the effective dissemination of reports. It is important that scientific
| |
− | and technical reports be readily available to as broad an audience as allowed to facilitate | |
− | research and to promote general education goals. Online access to information opens new | |
− | arenas to find reports. Reports that can be easily identified and ordered by libraries and the | |
− | general public through a variety of distribution channels (for example, wholesalers, library | |
− | jobbers, and online retailers) support the sustainability of the information. Archiving reports on | |
− | the Web with a unique identifier, and with an agency that can support their presence over | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 6
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | time, improves their long-term value. Therefore, creators of reports should envision a | |
− | dissemination strategy at the outset of the project. | |
− | | |
| | | |
| ===Access and Distribution=== | | ===Access and Distribution=== |
| + | :The ''Standard'' recognizes the importance of controlling access to some reports. Originating organizations have specific responsibilities to determine the distribution of reports. Classification/distribution information is provided by electronic labeling or in print. If physical marking of a report is not possible, identifying information must be accomplished by other means, such as metadata schema. Marking is the means of informing users of classified, or otherwise controlled, information about specific protection requirements for reports (for example, for internal use only). For print materials, this information should be easily visible on the cover or title page. For reports in a digital format, this information should be on the opening screen or other points of initial access. |
| | | |
− | This Standard recognizes the importance of controlling access to some reports. Originating
| + | :;Examples: |
− | organizations have specific responsibilities to determine the distribution of reports.
| + | ::*Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited. |
− | Classification/distribution information is provided by electronic labeling or in print. If physical
| + | ::*Distribution authorized to DoD components only (reason, date). Other requests for this document shall be referred to (controlling office information). |
− | marking of a report is not possible, identifying information must be accomplished by other
| |
− | means, such as metadata schema. Marking is the means of informing users of classified, or
| |
− | otherwise controlled, information about specific protection requirements for reports (for
| |
− | example, for internal use only). For print materials, this information should be easily visible on
| |
− | the cover or title page. For reports in a digital format, this information should be on the
| |
− | opening screen or other points of initial access.
| |
− | | |
− | Examples: | |
− | | |
− | Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited. | |
− | | |
− | Distribution authorized to DoD components only (reason, date). Other requests for this | |
− | document shall be referred to (controlling office information). | |
− | | |
| | | |
| ===Maintenance and Preservation=== | | ===Maintenance and Preservation=== |
| + | :The ''Standard'' advocates adopting practices that ensure long-term preservation of reports. Compilers and publishers of scientific and technical reports can and should take action to ensure their efforts will be appreciated for as long as the reports have value to users. This requirement means that reports should be prepared using techniques and materials that enable discovery and usability over the long term. Continuing discovery is assured by associating a report with clear, distinct, and unchanging identifying information ([[descriptive metadata]]). Continuing usability is assured by adopting an easily navigated and navigable structure, including maintenance of internal and external links, and by using publishing techniques that withstand the test of time. Time-tested publishing techniques involve the appropriate choice of publishing medium, such as acid-free paper or polyester-based silver gelatin film. However, publishing increasingly involves producing digital products that can be migrated and shared across media, platforms, applications, and organizations. At the time the Committee developed the ''Standard'', the most promising method for assuring continuing migration is employment of an XML DTD to encode electronic reports when produced. |
| | | |
− | This Standard advocates adopting practices that ensure long-term preservation of reports.
| + | :Many complex, electronic scientific and technical reports are used to produce multimedia publications and presentations. In such cases, it is particularly important to use presentation standards and practices that not only enable the widest possible access at the time of report creation, but also ensure continuous availability of content and structure despite changes in the delivery environment. In cases of multimedia reports, it is desirable to preserve the original presentation media as well as the original content. When this preservation cannot be achieved, it is most important to preserve the content so that the original source material is preserved. |
− | Compilers and publishers of scientific and technical reports can and should take action to
| |
− | ensure their efforts will be appreciated for as long as the reports have value to users. This
| |
− | requirement means that reports should be prepared using techniques and materials that
| |
− | enable discovery and usability over the long term. Continuing discovery is assured by
| |
− | associating a report with clear, distinct, and unchanging identifying information (descriptive
| |
− | metadata). Continuing usability is assured by adopting an easily navigated and navigable
| |
− | structure, including maintenance of internal and external links, and by using publishing
| |
− | techniques that withstand the test of time. Time-tested publishing techniques involve the
| |
− | appropriate choice of publishing medium, such as acid-free paper or polyester-based silver
| |
− | gelatin film. However, publishing increasingly involves producing digital products that can be
| |
− | migrated and shared across media, platforms, applications, and organizations. At the time the
| |
− | Committee developed this Standard, the most promising method for assuring continuing
| |
− | migration is employment of an XML DTD to encode electronic reports when produced.
| |
− | | |
− | Many complex, electronic scientific and technical reports are used to produce multimedia | |
− | publications and presentations. In such cases, it is particularly important to use presentation | |
− | standards and practices that not only enable the widest possible access at the time of report | |
− | creation, but also ensure continuous availability of content and structure despite changes in | |
− | the delivery environment. In cases of multimedia reports, it is desirable to preserve the | |
− | original presentation media as well as the original content. When this preservation cannot be | |
− | achieved, it is most important to preserve the content so that the original source material is | |
− | preserved. | |
| | | |
| ==Components of Reports - Overview== | | ==Components of Reports - Overview== |
| | | |
| + | ===Introduction=== |
| + | :There are many possible patterns for organizing the components of reports. Some of these are referenced in Appendix D, Model Formats for Organizing a Scientific or Technical Report. These model formats allow for presenting information about the creation, structure, content, and availability of reports in a readily comprehensible manner. When not using traditional publishing channels, the author/creator should ensure this information is captured and available to potential readers/users. |
| | | |
− | 4.1 Introduction
| + | ===Metadata=== |
− | | + | :A scientific or technical report is an important information resource and, as such, requires effective information management. The body of the report, with its discussion of methods, results, and conclusions, is content. Any information that helps the user find, assemble, and properly attribute the report are metadata. |
− | There are many possible patterns for organizing the components of reports. Some of these
| |
− | are referenced in Appendix D, Model Formats for Organizing a Scientific or Technical Report.
| |
− | These model formats allow for presenting information about the creation, structure, content,
| |
− | and availability of reports in a readily comprehensible manner. When not using traditional | |
− | publishing channels, the author/creator should ensure this information is captured and
| |
− | available to potential readers/users.
| |
− | | |
| | | |
− | 4.2 Metadata
| + | :Metadata are a significant matter for the ''Standard'' because of the large amount and diversity of data represented. The quantity and diversity of report content and format presented information management challenges in an era when reports were published exclusively on paper; in the digital age these challenges have multiplied considerably. A scientific or technical report that does not take metadata into account has no readily-found identity and will not be used. To avoid this problem, compilers of reports must provide metadata in three broad classes: descriptive, structural, and administrative. |
| | | |
− | A scientific or technical report is an important information resource and, as such, requires
| + | :;Descriptive Metadata |
− | effective information management. The body of the report, with its discussion of methods,
| + | ::[[Descriptive metadata]], such as cataloging information prepared following standards such as [[Dublin Core]] or MARC 21, convey information that helps the user find a report and distinguish it from other similar ones. [[Descriptive metadata]] are commonly used for resource discovery, such as author/title/subject searching, or grouping like objects for browsing. Such metadata include the title and creator (author), as well as any keywords or subject references. |
− | results, and conclusions, is content. Any information that helps the user find, assemble, and
| + | :;Structural Metadata |
− | properly attribute the report are metadata.
| + | ::[[Structural metadata]] explain the relationship between parts of multipart objects and enhance internal navigation. Such metadata include a [[table of contents]] or [[content aid|list of figures and tables]]. |
| + | :;Administrative Metadata |
| + | ::[[Administrative metadata]] support maintaining and archiving reports and ensure their long-term availability. [[Administrative metadata]] are needed for migration of data from one format to another and contain rights information used for access control. Such metadata include type and version of software used in preparing the report and rights-management requirements. |
| | | |
− | Metadata are a significant matter for this Standard because of the large amount and diversity
| + | ===Components=== |
− | of data represented. The quantity and diversity of report content and format presented
| + | :The author/creator of a scientific or technical report must keep all metadata requirements in mind throughout report creation and should prepare the components to enable ready recognition of key descriptive, structural, and administrative information about the report. |
− | information management challenges in an era when reports were published exclusively on
| |
− | paper; in the digital age these challenges have multiplied considerably. A scientific or
| |
− | technical report that does not take metadata into account has no readily-found identity and | |
− | will not be used. To avoid this problem, compilers of reports must provide metadata in three
| |
− | broad classes: descriptive, structural, and administrative.
| |
| | | |
− | 4.2.1 Descriptive Metadata
| + | :Table 1 presents the ''Standard'' components of scientific and technical reports in the traditional order of presentation. In reports organized in this manner, the listed components from cover through acknowledgments are commonly referred to as front matter, the components from summary through references are referred to as the body or text matter, and components from appendices through [[distribution metadata|distribution list]] are referred to as back matter. |
| | | |
− | Descriptive metadata, such as cataloging information prepared following standards such as
| + | :In the Inclusion Status column, the table indicates which components are required by the ''Standard'', which are optional, and which are conditional. Finally, in the column headed Function, the table indicates the primary role served by the information conveyed in each component. |
− | Dublin Core or MARC 21, convey information that helps the user find a report and distinguish
| |
− | it from other similar ones. Descriptive metadata are commonly used for resource discovery,
| |
− | such as author/title/subject searching, or grouping like objects for browsing. Such metadata
| |
− | include the title and creator (author), as well as any keywords or subject references.
| |
| | | |
− | 4.2.2 Structural Metadata
| + | :{|class="wikitable" width=100% style="text-align:center;" |
− | | + | |+Table 1: Components of reports |
− | Structural metadata explain the relationship between parts of multipart objects and enhance
| + | | |
− | internal navigation. Such metadata include a table of contents or list of figures and tables.
| + | !Component!!Inclusion Status!!Function |
− | | + | |- |
− | 4.2.3 Administrative Metadata
| + | !rowspan="11"|Front Matter |
− | | + | |[[Report cover|Cover]]||Optional||[[Descriptive metadata]] |
− | Administrative metadata support maintaining and archiving reports and ensure their long-term
| + | |- |
− | availability. Administrative metadata are needed for migration of data from one format to
| + | |[[Discovery metadata|Title Section]]||Required||[[Descriptive metadata]], such as [[Dublin Core]] elements: Identifier, Title, Creator, Publisher, Contributor, Date, and Language |
− | another and contain rights information used for access control. Such metadata include type
| + | |- |
− | and version of software used in preparing the report and rights-management requirements.
| + | |[[distribution metadata|Notice Section]]||Conditional (include when needed to specify intellectual property rights or state restrictions on access or use)||[[Administrative metadata]], such as the [[Dublin Core]] elements: Rights Management and Format |
− | | + | |- |
− | | + | |[[Report format|Format Information Section]]||Conditional (include when the original is created in digital format)||[[Administrative metadata]], such as [[Dublin Core]] element: Format |
− | Page 8
| + | |- |
− | | + | |[[Discovery metadata|Report Documentation Section]]||Conditional (include in reports prepared for federal governmental agencies)||style="text-align:left;"| |
− | | + | *[[Descriptive metadata]], such as the [[Dublin Core]] elements: Title, Creator, and Publisher |
− | ©2005 NISO
| + | *Source of [[administrative metadata]], such as the [[Dublin Core]] element: Rights Management |
− | | + | |- |
− | | + | |[[Document abstract|Abstract Section]]||Required||[[Descriptive metadata]], such as the [[Dublin Core]] elements: Description, Subject, and Coverage |
− | | + | |- |
− | | + | |[[Table of contents|Contents Section]]||Required||[[Structural metadata]] |
− | | + | |- |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| + | |[[Content aid|List of Figures and Tables]]||Conditional (include when there are more than 5 figures and/or tables)||[[Structural metadata]] |
− | | + | |- |
− | | + | |[[Foreword]]||Conditional (include when background and context is needed)||[[Descriptive metadata]] |
− | 4.3 Components
| + | |- |
− | | + | |[[Preface]]||Conditional (include when background and context is needed)||[[Descriptive metadata]] |
− | The author/creator of a scientific or technical report must keep all metadata requirements in
| + | |- |
− | mind throughout report creation and should prepare the components to enable ready
| + | |[[Report acknowledgment|Acknowledgments]]||Conditional (include when significant)||[[report content|Content]] |
− | recognition of key descriptive, structural, and administrative information about the report.
| + | |- |
− | | + | !rowspan="7"|Body or Text Matter |
− | Table 1 presents the standard components of scientific and technical reports in the traditional
| + | |[[Document summary|Summary]]||Required||[[report content|Content]] |
− | order of presentation. In reports organized in this manner, the listed components from cover
| + | |- |
− | through acknowledgments are commonly referred to as front matter, the components from
| + | |[[Report stage-setting section|Introduction]]||Required||[[report content|Content]] |
− | summary through references are referred to as the body or text matter, and components from
| + | |- |
− | appendices through distribution list are referred to as back matter.
| + | |[[Report undertaking section|Methods, Assumptions, and Procedures]]||Required||[[report content|Content]] |
− | | + | |- |
− | In the Inclusion Status column, the table indicates which components are required by this
| + | |[[report finding|Results and Discussion]]||Required||[[report content|Content]] |
− | Standard, which are optional, and which are conditional. Finally, in the column headed
| + | |- |
− | Function, the table indicates the primary role served by the information conveyed in each
| + | |[[Report interpretation|Conclusions]]||Required||[[report content|Content]] |
− | component.
| + | |- |
− | | + | |[[report recommendation|Recommendations]]||Conditional (include when purpose of report is to suggest a course of action)||[[report content|Content]] |
− | | + | |- |
− | Table 1: Components of reports | + | |[[document reference|References]]||Conditional (use if references are provided)||[[Structural metadata]], such as the [[Dublin Core]] element: Relation |
− | | + | |- |
− | | + | !rowspan="6"|Back Matter |
− | | + | |[[document appendix|Appendices]]||Conditional (include when needed to supplement Results and Discussion)||[[Structural metadata]] |
− | Component | + | |- |
− | | + | |[[document bibliography|Bibliography]]||Conditional (include when needed to amplify references)||[[Structural metadata]] |
− | Inclusion Status | + | |- |
− | | + | |[[Report token|List of Symbols, Abbreviations, and Acronyms]]||Conditional (include if symbols, abbreviations, or acronyms appear in any other component of the report; this section might appear as part of the front matter)||[[Structural metadata]] |
− | Function | + | |- |
− | | + | |[[document glossary|Glossary]]||Conditional (include if report incorporates terms unfamiliar to the intended audience)||[[Structural metadata]] |
− | | + | |- |
− | Cover | + | |[[document index|Index]]||Conditional (include when needed to ensure that a user locates all references to a concept)||[[Structural metadata]] |
− | | + | |- |
− | Optional | + | |[[distribution metadata|Distribution List]]||Conditional (include when needed to control access)||[[Administrative metadata]], such as the [[Dublin Core]] element: Rights Management |
− | | + | |} |
− | Descriptive metadata | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Title Section | |
− | | |
− | Required | |
− | | |
− | Descriptive metadata, such as | |
− | | |
− | Dublin Core elements: Identifier, | |
− | | |
− | Title, Creator, Publisher, Contributor, | |
− | Date, and Language | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Notice Section | |
− | | |
− | Conditional (include when needed to specify | |
− | intellectual property rights or state restrictions | |
− | on access or use) | |
− | | |
− | Administrative metadata, such as | |
− | the Dublin Core elements: Rights | |
− | Management and Format | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Format Information | |
− | | |
− | Conditional (include when the original is | |
− | | |
− | Administrative metadata, such as | |
− | | |
− | k.
| |
− | | |
− | Section
| |
− | | |
− | created in digital format)
| |
− | | |
− | Dublin Core element: Format | |
− | | |
− | 0)
| |
− | | |
− | Report | |
− | | |
− | Conditional (include in reports prepared for | |
− | | |
− | Descriptive metadata, such as the | |
− | | |
− | -t-»
| |
− | | |
− | ro
| |
− | | |
− | *->
| |
− | | |
− | c
| |
− | | |
− | o
| |
− | | |
− | Documentation
| |
− | | |
− | Section
| |
− | | |
− | federal governmental agencies)
| |
− | | |
− | Dublin Core elements: Title, Creator, | |
− | and Publisher | |
− | | |
− | Source of administrative metadata, | |
− | such as the Dublin Core element: | |
− | Rights Management | |
− | | |
− | k_
| |
− | | |
− | Li-
| |
− | | |
− | Abstract Section | |
− | | |
− | Required | |
− | | |
− | Descriptive metadata, such as the | |
− | Dublin Core elements: Description, | |
− | Subject, and Coverage | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Contents Section | |
− | | |
− | Required | |
− | | |
− | Structural metadata | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | List of Figures and | |
− | Tables | |
− | | |
− | Conditional (include when there are more | |
− | than 5 figures and/or tables) | |
− | | |
− | Structural metadata | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Foreword | |
− | | |
− | Conditional (include when background and | |
− | context is needed) | |
− | | |
− | Descriptive metadata | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Preface | |
− | | |
− | Conditional (include when background and | |
− | context is needed) | |
− | | |
− | Descriptive metadata | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Acknowledgments | |
− | | |
− | Conditional (include when significant) | |
− | | |
− | Content | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 9
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Table 1 (continued)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Component
| |
− | | |
− | Inclusion Status
| |
− | | |
− | Function
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Summary | |
− | | |
− | Required | |
− | | |
− | Content | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Introduction | |
− | | |
− | Required | |
− | | |
− | Content | |
− | | |
− | . 0)
| |
− | | |
− | " *-»
| |
− | o +-
| |
− | | |
− | >» ^
| |
− | ~o 2
| |
− | | |
− | Methods, | |
− | Assumptions, and | |
− | Procedures | |
− | | |
− | Required | |
− | | |
− | Content | |
− | | |
− | Results and | |
− | Discussion | |
− | | |
− | Required | |
− | | |
− | Content | |
− | | |
− | CO S
| |
− | 1-
| |
− | | |
− | Conclusions | |
− | | |
− | Required | |
− | | |
− | Content | |
− | | |
− | Recommendations | |
− | | |
− | Conditional (include when purpose of report is | |
− | to suggest a course of action) | |
− | | |
− | Content | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | References | |
− | | |
− | Conditional (use if references are provided) | |
− | | |
− | Structural metadata, such as the | |
− | Dublin Core element: Relation | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Appendices | |
− | | |
− | Conditional (include when needed to | |
− | supplement Results and Discussion) | |
− | | |
− | Structural metadata | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Bibliography | |
− | | |
− | Conditional (include when needed to amplify | |
− | references) | |
− | | |
− | Structural metadata | |
− | | |
− | 0)
| |
− | | |
− | +->
| |
− | | |
− | +-*
| |
− | | |
− | ro
| |
− | | |
− | List of Symbols, | |
− | Abbreviations, and | |
− | Acronyms | |
− | | |
− | Conditional (include if symbols, abbreviations, | |
− | or acronyms appear in any other component | |
− | of the report; this section might appear as | |
− | part of the front matter) | |
− | | |
− | Structural metadata | |
− | | |
− | o
| |
− | | |
− | Glossary | |
− | | |
− | Conditional (include if report incorporates | |
− | terms unfamiliar to the intended audience) | |
− | | |
− | Structural metadata | |
− | | |
− | (0
| |
− | | |
− | 00
| |
− | | |
− | Index | |
− | | |
− | Conditional (include when needed to ensure | |
− | that a user locates all references to a | |
− | concept) | |
− | | |
− | Structural metadata | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Distribution List | |
− | | |
− | Conditional (include when needed to control | |
− | access) | |
− | | |
− | Administrative metadata, such as | |
− | the Dublin Core element: Rights | |
− | Management | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 5 Components of Reports - Details _
| |
| | | |
| + | ==Components of Reports - Details== |
| This section provides guidance on organizing the following report components: | | This section provides guidance on organizing the following report components: |
| + | *Required elements, which are compulsory or mandatory when exchanging data |
| + | *Conditional elements, which are used under specified conditions when exchanging data |
| + | *Optional elements, which may be used when exchanging data [definition from EDSC Glossary] |
| | | |
− | • Required elements, which are compulsory or mandatory when exchanging data
| + | ===Front Matter=== |
− | | + | :Front matter consists of all materials preceding the main content and provides: |
− | • Conditional elements, which are used under specified conditions when exchanging data
| + | :*a general idea of the purpose and scope of reports; |
− | | + | :*background about, or a context for, reports; and |
− | • Optional elements, which may be used when exchanging data [definition from EDSC
| + | :*lists for finding specific chapters, headings, figures, and tables. |
− | Glossary]
| + | :Front matter also provides information needed for cataloging in bibliographic databases and digital libraries. The ''Standard'' further discusses (1) '''[[Report cover|cover]]''', (2) '''[[Discovery metadata|title section]]''', (3) '''[[distribution metadata|notice of distribution and access restrictions]]''', (4) '''[[report format|format information]]''', (5) '''[[Discovery metadata|report documentation page]]''', (6) '''[[document abstract|abstract]]''', (7) '''[[table of contents|contents]]''', (8) '''[[content aid|list(s) of figures and tables]]''', (9) '''[[foreword]]''', (10) '''[[preface]]''', and (11) '''[[report acknowledgment|acknowledgments]]''' in details. |
− | | |
− | 5.1 Front Matter
| |
− | | |
− | Front matter consists of all materials preceding the main content and provides: | |
− | | |
− | • a general idea of the purpose and scope of reports;
| |
− | | |
− | • background about, or a context for, reports; and
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 10
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | • lists for finding specific chapters, headings, figures, and tables.
| |
− | | |
− | It also provides information needed for cataloging in bibliographic databases and digital
| |
− | libraries. A discussion of the purpose and scope of each element of front matter follows and
| |
− | suggests best practices for the location of such information.
| |
− | | |
− | 5.1.1 Cover | |
− | | |
− | Although considered an optional component, a cover provides physical protection for a print
| |
− | report and displays major metadata elements for resource discovery. Electronic versions of | |
− | reports, especially in PDF, often include a cover to replicate the look of the print version. A
| |
− | cover identifies the report number, title, author(s), and any distribution limitations. If classified
| |
− | or proprietary information appears in a report, a notice on the cover indicates that such
| |
− | material is included. The best practices for including data elements of a report cover are as
| |
− | follows:
| |
− | | |
− | • Report number (can also be on the back cover, or on both)
| |
− | | |
− | • Report title and subtitle, if used (should be the same on the cover, title page, and report
| |
− | documentation page)
| |
− | | |
− | • Title and numbering of series, if the report is issued in a series (can also be on the back
| |
− | cover, or both)
| |
− | | |
− | • Author, principal investigator, editor, and/or compiler
| |
− | | |
− | • Publisher (the organization that assumes responsibility for publication, which may or may
| |
− | not be the same as the sponsoring organization)
| |
− | | |
− | • Date of publication (optional; can defer to the title page or to the copyright page)
| |
− | | |
− | • Distribution limitations
| |
− | | |
− | • Sponsoring organization of published research
| |
− | | |
− | • A bar code or other indication of the International Standard Book Number (ISBN) or
| |
− | International Standard Serial Number (ISSN) and the price (optional). This information is
| |
− | usually included on the back cover of the report as well and may facilitate managing
| |
− | inventory.
| |
− | | |
− | • Technical requirements (for example, video, audio, digital)
| |
− | | |
− | • Subject
| |
− | | |
− | Legal or policy considerations of the sponsoring organization may require using additional
| |
− | data elements.
| |
− | | |
− | 5.1.2 Title Section
| |
− | | |
− | The required title section indicates the subject and content of the report and provides
| |
− | information needed for description and bibliographic control of, and access to, a report.
| |
− | | |
− | These data are critical to discover, acquire, store, and provide access to information
| |
− | resources. If the performing and sponsoring organizations are different entities, the title
| |
− | section clearly identifies the different responsibilities (that is, performance and sponsorship).
| |
− | The information in the cover and title section must be consistent; if an optional Report
| |
− | Documentation Page is used, its bibliographic data must also be consistent with the
| |
− | information in the cover and title section. The recommended data elements of a title section
| |
− | are as follows:
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 11
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | • Report number
| |
− | | |
− | • Report title and subtitle, if used (should be the same on the cover, title page, and report
| |
− | documentation page)
| |
− | | |
− | • Title and numbering of series, if the report is issued in a series
| |
− | | |
− | • Author, principal investigator, editor, and/or compiler, with the primary creator listed first,
| |
− | per standard library cataloging practice
| |
− | | |
− | • Performing organization (author/creator affiliation)
| |
− | | |
− | • Publication data, including place of publication, publisher (which may or may not be the
| |
− | same as the sponsoring organization), and date (may also defer to the copyright page)
| |
− | | |
− | • Type of report and period covered, where applicable (conditional)
| |
− | | |
− | • Contract or grant number, where applicable (may defer to the copyright page)
| |
− | | |
− | • Sponsoring or issuing organization (if different than the performing organization)
| |
− | | |
− | • Subject descriptors (e.g., keywords)
| |
− | | |
− | Figures 2a and 2b show a sample cover and title page for which the performing and
| |
− | sponsoring organizations are the same. Figures 3a and 3b show a sample cover and title
| |
− | page for which the performing and sponsoring organizations are different. Legal or policy
| |
− | considerations of the organization for which a report is prepared may require using additional
| |
− | data elements in these sections.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 12
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 1
| |
− | | |
− | <D
| |
− | | |
− | o
| |
− | | |
− | Z5
| |
− | | |
− | <D
| |
− | | |
− | o
| |
− | | |
− | to
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | a>
| |
− | | |
− | n
| |
− | | |
− | a
| |
− | | |
− | 03
| |
− | | |
− | o
| |
− | | |
− | 1
| |
− | | |
− | CN
| |
− | | |
− | Q
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | CO
| |
− | | |
− | 03
| |
− | | |
− | J:
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Q
| |
− | | |
− | a:
| |
− | | |
− | <
| |
− | | |
− | o
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Carderock Division
| |
− | | |
− | Naval Surface Warfare Center
| |
− | | |
− | Bethesda, MD 20084-5000
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | -1
| |
− | | |
− | Performing and
| |
− | sponsoring organization
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | CARDIVNSWC-TR—93/013 December 1993
| |
− | Machinery Research and Development Directorate
| |
− | Technical Report
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | DD 21A—A Capable, Affordable, Modular
| |
− | 21st Century Destroyer
| |
− | | |
− | by
| |
− | | |
− | William J. Levedahl, Samuel R. Shank, and William P. O’Reagan
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Figure 2a: Sample cover page for which the performing and
| |
− | sponsoring organizations are the same
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 13
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | I-
| |
− | | |
− | Performing and
| |
− | sponsoring organization
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Carderock Division
| |
− | Naval Surface Warfare Center
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Bethesda, MD 20084-5000
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | CARDIVNSWC-TR—93/013 December 1993
| |
− | Machinery Research and Development Directorate
| |
− | | |
− | Technical Report
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | DD 21A—A Capable, Affordable, Modular
| |
− | | |
− | 21st Centurv Destroyer
| |
− | | |
− | by
| |
− | | |
− | William J. Levedahl, Samuel R. Shank, and William P. O’Reagan
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Figure 2b: Sample title page for which the performing and
| |
− | sponsoring organizations are the same
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 14
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | .I
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | imiill
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 1111 ii 111
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | in" ii
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 4
| |
− | | |
− | '®> 0^1
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | UNCLASSIFIED
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | NASP Contractor Report 1137
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Damping of Thermal
| |
− | Acoustic Oscillations
| |
− | in Hydrogen Systems
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Youfan Gu and Klaus D. Timmerhaus
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Grant NAG3-1018
| |
− | | |
− | September 1992
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Notice
| |
− | | |
− | This document is for quick release to or¬
| |
− | ganizations participating in the National
| |
− | Aero-Space Plane Program (NASP). Cus¬
| |
− | tomary editing and review have been
| |
− | waived in order to provide rapid dissem¬
| |
− | ination of data and preliminary results.
| |
− | Distribution is authorized to U.S. Govern¬
| |
− | ment Agencies and U.S. Government
| |
− | Agency Contractors Only to protect critical
| |
− | technology, 30 Nov 90. Other requests for
| |
− | this document shall be referred to the NASP
| |
− | Joint Program Office, Wright-Patterson
| |
− | AFB, OH.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Sponsoring organization
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Performing organization
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | I
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | University of Colorado
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | DEPARTMENT OF CHEMICAL ENGINEERING
| |
− | ENGINEERING CENTER. EOOT2-6
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | UNCLASSIFIED
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | C4MHJSBOX424
| |
− | BOULDER. CO 8CS09
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Figure 3a: Sample cover for which the performing and
| |
− | sponsoring organizations are different
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 15
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | J
| |
− | | |
− | □
| |
− | | |
− | h
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | I
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Final Technical Report
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | LASER DIAGNOSTICS FOR REACTING FLOWS
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Grant AFOSR F49620-01-1-0145
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Submitted by
| |
− | | |
− | R. K. Hanson, Principal Investigator
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Prepared for
| |
− | | |
− | air force office of scientific research ◄- Sponsoring organization
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | For the Period
| |
− | | |
− | January 1,2001 to December 31,2003
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Performing organization
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | I
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | HIGH TEMPERATURE GASDYNAMICS LABORATORY
| |
− | Mechanical Engineering Department
| |
− | Stanford University
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Figure 3b: Sample title page for which the performing and
| |
− | sponsoring organizations are different
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 16
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 5.1.2.1 Report Number
| |
− | | |
− | Each report requires a report number unique within the organization that appears in a
| |
− | consistent location for each document in a series. A report number is composed of an
| |
− | alphanumeric report code (2-16 characters) and, if desired, a numeric sequential group
| |
− | (1-14 digits indicating the year and sequence of report issuance). Different sponsoring and
| |
− | performing organizations usually assign separate report numbers; so a report may have
| |
− | multiple numbers. These numbers should appear together in a prominent location in the front
| |
− | matter. ANSI/NISO Z39.23-1997 (R2002), Standard Technical Report Number (STRN)
| |
− | Format and Creation, provides guidance on establishing and using standard scientific and
| |
− | technical report numbers.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 5.1.2.2 Title and Subtitle
| |
− | | |
− | The title is especially important in abstracting, cataloging, indexing, and referencing a report
| |
− | and for informing potential readers of the content. A subtitle may be added to further define
| |
− | the contents. The words of the title and subtitle define and limit the topic of the report and
| |
− | appear on the cover, title section, and optional Report Documentation Page, using exactly the
| |
− | same wording. In creating the title of a report, a creator using best practices:
| |
− | | |
− | • selects words that distinguish the report from any other on the same general topic rather
| |
− | than writing, “Report on...”
| |
− | | |
− | • uses a distinctive subtitle for clarity if the report is one in a series or a supplement to
| |
− | previously published work (information about the period covered—for example, month,
| |
− | quarter, or year—may be included in the subtitle of reports in series); and
| |
− | | |
− | • spells out abbreviations and acronyms.
| |
− | | |
− | When a report consists of more than one volume (or binding), the title is repeated in a
| |
− | separate title section, and each separate volume is identified by an Arabic number and a
| |
− | volume title or subtitle.
| |
− | | |
− | Example:
| |
− | | |
− | Interstellar and Interplanetary Dust
| |
− | Volume 2: Supernova Isotopic Enrichments
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 5.1.2.3 Author(s) / Creator(s)
| |
− | | |
− | The author/creator of a report is reserved for the person or persons responsible for
| |
− | originating the scientific or technical information or the text of the report and who can
| |
− | effectively defend the content of the report to a peer group. The primary author/creator is
| |
− | always identified first. Identifying an editor is justified when the editor has applied subject
| |
− | matter expertise in preparing the report.
| |
− | | |
− | An author’s/creator’s name appears on the cover (see 5.1.1) and title section (see 5.1.2) and,
| |
− | if used, the Report Documentation Page in identical form. The preferred order is first name,
| |
− | middle name or initial, surname. Academic degrees are not given. However, authors/creators
| |
− | or contributors can identify themselves by their job titles in the organization (Jane R. Doe,
| |
− | Cost Analyst; Jack T. Doe, Head, Research and Development Division) or by their functions
| |
− | as contributors (Jane R. Doe, Principal Investigator; JackT. Doe, Compiler). If these titles are
| |
− | used, they should be used consistently within an organization or series. In cases of multiple
| |
− | authors/creators from different organizations, the names appear with their organizational
| |
− | affiliations.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 17
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 5.1.2.4 Performing and Sponsoring Organizations
| |
− | | |
− | The performing organization conducts research; the sponsoring organization funds research
| |
− | and usually, but not always, controls report publication and distribution. The performing and
| |
− | sponsoring organization may be the same. Reports that present the results of research done
| |
− | under contracts or grants identify both a performing and a sponsoring organization if different.
| |
− | In such cases, the name of the sponsoring organization, the performing organization (or other
| |
− | responsible units), and the complete address(es) appear on the title section. If there are
| |
− | multiple sponsoring organizations, each is listed and the functions of each are identified.
| |
− | | |
− | 5.1.3 Notice of Distribution/Access Restrictions
| |
− | | |
− | 5.1.3.1 Copyright
| |
− | | |
− | Some organizations may opt to use a traditional copyright page common within the publishing
| |
− | industry. The copyright section may include the following information, if available:
| |
− | | |
− | • The complete name of the sponsoring organization, including the contract number
| |
− | authorizing the research, and/or any organizations providing funding for the report
| |
− | | |
− | • Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication (CIP) Data
| |
− | | |
− | • An ISBN and/or ISSN
| |
− | | |
− | • The country in which the report was produced
| |
− | | |
− | • Permission for use of proprietary information, such as photo credits
| |
− | | |
− | • The mission statement of the producer, trademark information, and any disclaimers from
| |
− | the producer
| |
− | | |
− | • A copyright symbol, year, and the name of the copyright holder
| |
− | | |
− | • Authority to copy the contents or require permission from the producer prior to copying.
| |
− | While federal government publications may be freely copied by the public, a request for
| |
− | permission allows the publisher to track the uses of the report.
| |
− | | |
− | • The name, complete address, and phone number of the producer and how additional
| |
− | copies of the report may be obtained; a Web or email address, or both, may be included.
| |
− | Copyrights on reports are not always formally registered; material prepared for the U.S.
| |
− | Government is usually available for public dissemination without copyright.
| |
− | | |
− | The order of appearance is not important so long as all elements appear. The recommended
| |
− | location is the verso (back) of the title page. If these elements are included on the copyright
| |
− | page, it is at the discretion of the publisher if they are included in other sections of the front
| |
− | matter.
| |
− | | |
− | 5.1.3.2 Distribution Limitations / Notices
| |
− | | |
− | When necessary to call attention to certain aspects of a report, such as its security
| |
− | classification, restricted distribution, or proprietary information, appropriate notices appear on
| |
− | the cover and title section. For example, a notice may alert the reader that a particular report
| |
− | is:
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | • a presentation of preliminary findings subject to revisions, or
| |
− | | |
− | • a formal draft or a working paper intended to elicit comments and ideas.
| |
− | | |
− | If disclaimers or similar notices are needed, they appear on the inside front cover or the
| |
− | optional copyright page that follows the title page of a printed report. Notices may also alert
| |
− | the reader to certain legal conditions, for example, using brand or trade names in the report.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 18
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Generic terms are preferable to brand or trade names if scientific and technical accuracy can
| |
− | be maintained in using them.
| |
− | | |
− | A disclaimer may or may not be appropriate for government-generated reports. It is the
| |
− | responsibility of each organization to determine the appropriate notice for the reports it
| |
− | produces and to coordinate these decisions with the appropriate legal counsel. Government
| |
− | classified material will have specific regulations; producers should follow the regulations
| |
− | applicable to their government agency.
| |
− | | |
− | Figure 4 shows a sample cover with a notice of restricted distribution. Figure 5 illustrates a
| |
− | cover with no distribution restrictions.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 19
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | XB3 ITEMS WITH A POSITIVE DEMAND LEVEL
| |
− | AND A REORDER POINT OF ZERO
| |
− | | |
− | MSGT TONY PARRISH
| |
− | | |
− | AFLMA FINAL REPORT LS199718901
| |
− | TEAM MEMBERS
| |
− | | |
− | CAPTAIN BUDDY BERRY MR. JOHN DIETZ
| |
− | | |
− | MSGT TONY NICHOLSON DR. DOUGLAS BLAZER
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | JANUARY 1999
| |
− | | |
− | Distribution authorized to U.S. Government agencies and their contractors for reasons of administrative or
| |
− | operational use, Jan 99. Other requests for this document shall be referred to AFI.MA/LGS.
| |
− | | |
− | AIR FORCE LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT AGENCY
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | MAXWELL AFB, GUNTER ANNEX AL 36114-3236
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | OTIC QUALITY WSIBOTED 2
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 19990426 038
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Figure 4: Sample page with a notice of restricted distribution
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 20
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | AFRL-VA-WP-TP-2003-315
| |
− | | |
− | UAV TASK ASSIGNMENT WITH
| |
− | TIMING CONSTRAINTS
| |
− | | |
− | Corey Schumacher
| |
− | Phillip Chandler
| |
− | Meir Pachter
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | JULY 2003
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | This material is declared a work of the U.S. Government and is not subject to copyright
| |
− | protection in the United States.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | AIR VEHICLES DIRECTORATE
| |
− | | |
− | AIR FORCE RESEARCH LABORATORY
| |
− | | |
− | AIR FORCE MATERIEL COMMAND
| |
− | | |
− | WRIGHT-PATTERSON AIR FORCE BASE, OH 45433-7542
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 20030822 055
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Figure 5: Sample page with no distribution restrictions
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 21
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 5.1.4 Format Information
| |
− | | |
− | Reports produced in digital format should provide easily-accessible metadata describing the
| |
− | programs used in producing the report. Creators of reports should also consider the original
| |
− | and on-going accessibility of items requiring unique or specialized hardware or software not
| |
− | normally used by their primary audience.
| |
− | | |
− | 5.1.5 Report Documentation Page
| |
− | | |
− | Agencies within the federal government use a Report Documentation Page (e.g., a National
| |
− | Technical Information Service bibliographic data sheet or Standard Form 298) in addition to a
| |
− | title section. It is an optional component for academic and industrial reports.
| |
− | | |
− | Appendix E shows a sample Report Documentation Page containing all pertinent
| |
− | bibliographic data about the report (including keywords or identifiers) necessary for librarians,
| |
− | information specialists, and others concerned with information processing and handling. An
| |
− | abstract of 200 words or fewer is an integral part of this section. Some federal agencies
| |
− | require that reports prepared for them under contract or grant include a Report
| |
− | Documentation Page and specify its location. Academic and industrial report producers that
| |
− | use a report documentation page frequently place it as the final component of back matter. A
| |
− | Report Documentation Page is not listed in the table of contents unless it appears as back
| |
− | matter; however, it is paginated whether it appears as front or back matter. Instructions for
| |
− | completing a report documentation page appear in Appendix E of this Standard.
| |
− | | |
− | 5.1.6 Abstract
| |
− | | |
− | An abstract, a required component, presents a concise (approximately 200 words, although
| |
− | the length may vary; there may be restrictions in some automated databases) informative
| |
− | statement of the purpose, scope, methods, and major findings of the report, including results,
| |
− | conclusions, and recommendations. The informative abstract retains the tone and scope of
| |
− | the report but omits the details. The abstract typically appears in a separate section between
| |
− | the title section and table of contents, although reports that use a Report Documentation
| |
− | Page include the abstract as bibliographic data entered on the form. Because abstracts are
| |
− | also published by abstracting services to assist potential readers in determining if they are
| |
− | interested in the report, an abstract is independent of the rest of the report. An abstract
| |
− | contains no undefined symbols, abbreviations, or acronyms and makes no reference to
| |
− | references or illustrative material. ANSI/NISO Z39.14-1997 (R2002), Guidelines for Abstracts,
| |
− | the standard for preparing informative abstracts, provides examples of abstracts as well as
| |
− | guidance on their presentation and style.
| |
− | | |
− | An executive summary (see 5.2.1) may be used as an alternative to an abstract and includes
| |
− | information similar to an abstract, but in slightly more detail. An executive summary should
| |
− | not exceed 10 pages, dependent on the length of the report.
| |
− | | |
− | 5.1.7 Contents
| |
− | | |
− | The required contents section identifies the heading and location of, or link to, each major
| |
− | section of the front matter (excluding the title page and the contents section itself), the
| |
− | content, and the back matter. A contents section helps readers understand the organization
| |
− | and scope of a report. Headings in a table of contents are worded, spelled, punctuated, and
| |
− | numbered, if used, exactly as they are in the report. Creators should consider that page
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 22
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | numbers of digital items may not be static and alternate methods of efficient access may be
| |
− | needed. Figure 6 shows a sample contents section.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Contents
| |
− | | |
− | Abstract .iii
| |
− | | |
− | Figures.vi
| |
− | | |
− | Tables.vii
| |
− | | |
− | Foreword.viii
| |
− | | |
− | Preface.ix
| |
− | | |
− | Summary.2
| |
− | | |
− | Introduction.5
| |
− | | |
− | Methods, Assumptions, and Procedures.6
| |
− | | |
− | Electrofishing.7
| |
− | | |
− | Sample Preparation.8
| |
− | | |
− | Water Analysis.9
| |
− | | |
− | Statistics.10
| |
− | | |
− | Site Description .11
| |
− | | |
− | RM 38.11
| |
− | | |
− | RM 24.12
| |
− | | |
− | RM 19.12
| |
− | | |
− | Results and Discussion.13
| |
− | | |
− | Physical and Chemical Parameters.13
| |
− | | |
− | Fish Parameters.17
| |
− | | |
− | Species Richness .17
| |
− | | |
− | Species Diversity Indices .19
| |
− | | |
− | Weight/Length Distributions.21
| |
− | | |
− | Sampling Adequacy.23
| |
− | | |
− | Conclusions.25
| |
− | | |
− | Recommendations.27
| |
− | | |
− | References.29
| |
− | | |
− | Appendix: Weekly Fish Collection Data.31
| |
− | | |
− | Symbols, Abbreviations, and Acronyms.43
| |
− | | |
− | Glossary.45
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Figure 6: Sample table of contents section
| |
− | | |
− | It is useful to include a list of subheadings in the contents section at the beginning of each
| |
− | major report section that is more than 20 pages in length. Subheadings are also helpful for
| |
− | understanding complex material; however, not all levels of headings need to be listed in the
| |
− | contents section. First- and second-level headings may suffice. However, if any subheading
| |
− | of a given level is listed in the table of contents, all subheadings of that level must be
| |
− | included. (See also 6.4, Designation, for an explanation of page numbering.) Organizations
| |
− | may opt for a variation in the order of the table of contents. For instance, a preface may
| |
− | follow the title page to set the context of the report and precede the table on contents.
| |
− | | |
− | 5.1.8 List(s) of Figures and Tables
| |
− | | |
− | If a report contains more than five figures or tables, or some combination totaling more than
| |
− | five, a list of figures and/or tables is required. If a report contains fewer than five figures or
| |
− | tables, a list is optional. Figures and tables in the table of contents are numbered, worded,
| |
− | spelled, and punctuated exactly as they are in the report. The lists of figures and tables, titled
| |
− | “Figures” and “Tables,” respectively, follow the contents section. If the table of contents fills
| |
− | only half a page, the lists of figures and tables may follow the table of contents on the same
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 23
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | page. If lists of figures and tables are included in a report, all figures and tables are listed with
| |
− | their corresponding locations. A list of figures precedes a list of tables. If a report has many
| |
− | figures and few tables or few figures and many tables, they can be combined into a single list
| |
− | (“Figures and Tables”) with figures preceding tables.
| |
− | | |
− | 5.1.9 Foreword
| |
− | | |
− | The foreword is a conditional introductory statement that presents background material or
| |
− | places in context a report that is part of a series. It is written by an authority in the field other
| |
− | than the creator of the report. The name and affiliation of the creator of the foreword follow
| |
− | the last paragraph. A foreword and a preface are not interchangeable, and the information in
| |
− | them is not redundant. If both are included, the foreword precedes the preface.
| |
− | | |
− | 5.1.10 Preface
| |
− | | |
− | A preface is a conditional introductory statement that announces the purpose and scope of
| |
− | the report and acknowledges the contributions of individuals not identified as authors/creators
| |
− | or editors. Sometimes a preface specifies the audience for which a report is intended; it may
| |
− | also highlight the relationship of the report to a specific project or program. Material that is
| |
− | necessary for understanding the report belongs in the introduction not the preface.
| |
− | | |
− | A preface is usually written by the author/creator, editor, or other party responsible for the
| |
− | report. The name and affiliation do not appear at the end of the preface unless there might be
| |
− | doubt about its authorship. The preface follows the lists of figures and tables and optional
| |
− | foreword and begins a separate section titled “Preface.”
| |
− | | |
− | 5.1.11 Acknowledgments
| |
− | | |
− | Acknowledgments of technical assistance that contributed to the content of the report are
| |
− | made at an appropriate place in the preface or in the text; however, lengthy
| |
− | acknowledgments are often made in a conditional section titled “Acknowledgments.” This
| |
− | section follows the preface, in which case the preface does not contain acknowledgments. If
| |
− | there is no preface, “Acknowledgments” follows the contents section (or list(s) of figures and
| |
− | tables and foreword).
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 5.2 Body Matter
| |
− | | |
− | The body is the part of the report in which the creator describes methods, assumptions, and
| |
− | procedures, then presents and discusses the results and draws conclusions and
| |
− | recommends actions based on those results. The organization of a report depends on its
| |
− | subject matter and audience as well as its purpose. (See Appendix D for sample
| |
− | organizational models.) Thus, the organization of the content may vary widely and the
| |
− | organization of the report may be divided into sections or chapters. Information on the
| |
− | content follows.
| |
− | | |
− | 5.2.1 Summary
| |
− | | |
− | A summary is a required component of a report. It clearly states the key points of the report—
| |
− | including the problem under investigation, the principal results and conclusions, and a
| |
− | recommended course of action for decision makers. The summary differs from the abstract
| |
− | (see 5.1.6) in purpose, audience, and length. Because the summary restates key points,
| |
− | material not included in the text does not appear in the summary. Introductory material
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 24
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | (purpose, scope, and organization), descriptive material (nature and method of investigation),
| |
− | and the most important results and conclusions are summarized, with emphasis on the
| |
− | findings of the research and recommendations.
| |
− | | |
− | Although a summary depends on the content in that it introduces no new information, it is
| |
− | independent from the user’s point of view; therefore, all symbols, abbreviations, and
| |
− | acronyms are defined, and unusual terms are explained. A summary does not contain
| |
− | references or cross-references to other sections of the report.
| |
− | | |
− | If a print report exceeds 50 pages, a separate executive summary is often prepared for a
| |
− | management-level audience. An Executive Summary is a non-technical presentation that
| |
− | provides an adequate level of detail for decision makers needing a basic understanding of a
| |
− | research problem and the major findings but who do not plan to read the report in its entirety.
| |
− | Some Executive Summaries contain fiscal and political implications of the recommendations
| |
− | or results; such indications are frequently not a part of the report. Some organizations may
| |
− | opt to place the summary as the last component of the front matter instead of the first
| |
− | component of the text.
| |
− | | |
− | 5.2.2 Introduction
| |
− | | |
− | The required introduction provides readers with general information they need to understand
| |
− | more detailed information in the rest of the report. It introduces the subject, purpose, scope,
| |
− | and way the author/creator plans to develop the topic. The introduction also indicates the
| |
− | audience for the report: who is expected to read it and act on its recommendations or review
| |
− | its findings (this information may also be included in the preface). The introduction does not,
| |
− | however, include findings, conclusions, or recommendations.
| |
− | | |
− | The statement of the subject defines the topic and associated terminology and may include
| |
− | the theory behind the subject, its historical background, its significance, and a review of
| |
− | pertinent literature. The statement of the purpose indicates the reason for the investigation;
| |
− | the statement of the scope indicates the extent and limits of the investigation. The
| |
− | author/creator’s plan for developing the report usually presents a narrative outline of the
| |
− | body.
| |
− | | |
− | 5.2.3 Methods, Assumptions, and Procedures
| |
− | | |
− | A description of the methods, assumptions, and procedures used in an investigation is a
| |
− | required component. A succinct explanation of them enables readers to evaluate the results
| |
− | without referring extensively to the references. The description should be complete enough
| |
− | that a knowledgeable reader could duplicate the procedures of the investigation. The system
| |
− | of measurement (for example, metric or English) is identified. If the research included
| |
− | apparatus, instruments, or reagents, a description of the apparatus, the design and precision
| |
− | of the instruments, and the nature of the reagents are explained in this required section of
| |
− | text. (See also 6.5, Units and Numbers.)
| |
− | | |
− | 5.2.4 Results and Discussion
| |
− | | |
− | A required component of the report, results and their discussion can be presented in the
| |
− | same or in separate sections. The results section presents the findings based on the
| |
− | methods. The discussion section indicates the degree of accuracy and the significance of the
| |
− | results of the research described. Specific values used to substantiate conclusions appear in
| |
− | the body. Supporting details not essential to an understanding of the results appear in an
| |
− | appendix. Sometimes a section, “Presentation of Results,” includes figures and tables and
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 25
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | their captions (titles). Such figures and tables appear as close as possible following their
| |
− | discussion in the text. The discussion accounts for the results but does not interpret them.
| |
− | (See also 6.2, Visual and Tabular Matter.)
| |
− | | |
− | 5.2.5 Conclusions
| |
− | | |
− | The required conclusions section interprets findings that have been substantiated in the
| |
− | discussion of results and discusses their implications. The section introduces no new material
| |
− | other than remarks based on these findings. It includes the author’s/creator’s opinions and is
| |
− | written to be read independently of the text. The section could include a summary of the
| |
− | conclusions from similar studies, a conclusion based solely on the current results, or an
| |
− | overall conclusion. The following examples could be appropriate titles for this section:
| |
− | | |
− | • Conclusions - if deductions independent of specific conditions of the investigation are
| |
− | made
| |
− | | |
− | • Restatement of Results - if factual findings specific to the particular investigation are
| |
− | given
| |
− | | |
− | • Concluding Remarks - if opinions are included in addition to findings and conclusions
| |
− | | |
− | 5.2.6 Recommendations
| |
− | | |
− | The conditional recommendations section presents a course of action based on the results
| |
− | and conclusions of the study. Types of studies for which recommendations are often made
| |
− | include tests and experiments, field trials, specific design problems, feasibility studies, and
| |
− | market appraisals. Recommendations might include additional areas for study, alternate
| |
− | design approaches, or production decisions. Specific recommendations are presented in a
| |
− | numbered or bulleted list that is introduced by an informative lead-in sentence.
| |
− | Recommendations may also be included within the conclusions section.
| |
− | | |
− | 5.2.7 References
| |
− | | |
− | The conditional references section, if used, appears as the last section of the body and
| |
− | begins on a new page in print publications. This section may also be called “Sources,”
| |
− | | |
− | “Works Cited,” or “Bibliography,” depending on the nature of the referenced materials.
| |
− | | |
− | To help readers use and assess referenced materials, all references include the following
| |
− | elements: name of author(s)/creator(s), title of referenced work, and publication data or
| |
− | digital-access information. If a government document is referenced, the National Technical
| |
− | Information Service (NTIS) number is included, when available, to facilitate user access to
| |
− | the report.
| |
− | | |
− | References are prepared according to the accepted practice of the discipline of the primary
| |
− | author/creator of a report. (See also Appendix A.3, Style Manuals and Guides.) Three basic
| |
− | reference forms, each with its own advantage, are commonly used for reports. The number-
| |
− | identification system of citing material allows readers to locate references easily in a printed
| |
− | document. For this form, references are numbered consecutively with Arabic numbers in
| |
− | order of their first appearance in the text keyed to appropriate places in the text and fully
| |
− | identified in the successively numbered list of references.
| |
− | | |
− | In the second form of referencing, the author-date format, authors’ names, and dates of
| |
− | publication or creation are cited in the text in parentheses and keyed to an alphabetically
| |
− | arranged list of references. The author-date style helps readers to associate facts and ideas
| |
− | with their originators and date of origin.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 26
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | In the third form of referencing, publications may be noted in the context of a footnote,
| |
− | endnote, or referenced link within a report and the complete bibliographic reference, which
| |
− | can also include the title, author/creator, publisher, date, and location of the publisher,
| |
− | including specific page numbers with a document (for example, a journal article), may be
| |
− | included in the back matter in a bibliography.
| |
− | | |
− | If figures and tables are obtained from referenced material, the sources are identified in
| |
− | source or credit lines that are part of the figure(s) or table(s). A source or credit line contains
| |
− | adequate descriptive data to enable readers to verify the location of the original figure(s) or
| |
− | table(s). If the figure or table is used in its complete presentation (that is, both content and
| |
− | form), “Source” would be an appropriate lead-in to the citation. If either the content or form is
| |
− | modified, “Adapted from” would be appropriate lead-in wording. Such sources are not further
| |
− | identified in the list of references unless an additional reference to them appears in the text of
| |
− | the report. (See also 6.2, Visual and Tabular Matter.)
| |
− | | |
− | References may include information gathered from a Web page or site. Most citations of
| |
− | material from Internet sources should follow rules for journal articles.
| |
− | | |
− | Example:
| |
− | | |
− | Virillio, Paul, "Speed and Information: Cyberspace Alarm!" CTHEORY,
| |
− | | |
− | URL: http://www.freedonia.com/ctheory/, September 27, 1995.
| |
− | | |
− | The URL or other path information appears instead of the volume and number cited for a
| |
− | conventional journal. It is frequently useful to the reader to know the date when the material
| |
− | was accessed. In such cases, “Accessed [date]” would be appropriate wording.
| |
− | | |
− | Examples:
| |
− | | |
− | Bailey, C. W., "Electronic Serials and Related Topics: A Brief Discourse,"
| |
− | | |
− | message to multiple recipients of list VPIEJ-L (VPIEJ-L@VTVM1 .BITNET), April 23, 1992.
| |
− | | |
− | Carlyle, Paul, "Do Electronic Journals Make Sense?" message distributed on Internet
| |
− | by Paul Carlyle, RAND, June 1995 (e-mail carlyle@rand.org).
| |
− | | |
− | For other views on game theory, see Sadim Adan,
| |
− | http://www.unkx.com/xxx.yyy, last modified September 19, 1995.
| |
− | | |
− | Accessed November 17, 1999.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 5.3 Back Matter
| |
− | | |
− | The back matter supplements and clarifies the body of the report (for example, appendices),
| |
− | makes the body easier to use (for example, glossary, lists of symbols, abbreviations and
| |
− | acronyms, and index), and shows where additional information can be found (for example,
| |
− | bibliography). Some organizations consider the reference section to be part of the back
| |
− | matter; if the pages following the front matter are numbered sequentially, it is immaterial to
| |
− | the reader if the reference or bibliography section is part of the body or the back matter.
| |
− | | |
− | 5.3.1 Appendices
| |
− | | |
− | Appendices contain information that supplements, clarifies, or supports the content. These
| |
− | conditional components of back matter also contain material that might otherwise interfere
| |
− | with an orderly presentation of ideas in the body. Placing detailed explanations, supporting
| |
− | data, or long mathematical analyses in appendices shortens the text and makes it easier to
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 27
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | read. However, information essential to the purpose of the report should appear in the text.
| |
− | For example, in a report about a new mathematical analysis, the detailed derivation of
| |
− | equations belongs in the text, while other subjects, such as those that follow, appear in
| |
− | appendices:
| |
− | | |
− | • Detailed explanations and descriptions of test techniques and apparatus
| |
− | | |
− | • Content of other documents (for example, standard test procedures, laws, and
| |
− | management instructions)
| |
− | | |
− | • Extensive data in the form of figures or tables
| |
− | | |
− | • Computer listings of programs, input, and output
| |
− | | |
− | • Mathematical analyses
| |
− | | |
− | Other components of back matter (for example, bibliographies) do not appear in appendices.
| |
− | | |
− | Appendices usually follow the references or last section of the text. For print publications,
| |
− | each appendix begins on a new, right-hand page and has a title that appears below the
| |
− | appendix designation.
| |
− | | |
− | Example:
| |
− | | |
− | Appendix B
| |
− | | |
− | Complementary Energy Principle
| |
− | | |
− | Each appendix is referred to in the text. If the report contains more than one appendix, each
| |
− | is identified with a capital letter (Appendix A, Appendix B, etc.) in the order mentioned in the
| |
− | report. A single appendix is labeled, “Appendix.” Similar items may be combined to avoid
| |
− | creating unnecessary appendices. For example, several sample forms can be combined in a
| |
− | single appendix and labeled “Sample Forms” rather than each being identified as a separate
| |
− | appendix.
| |
− | | |
− | Although figures and tables are best integrated into the text following their initial mention,
| |
− | figures, tables, or other graphics of secondary importance that provide back-up data should
| |
− | be combined into an appendix. In appendices, figures precede tables, with both groups
| |
− | arranged in numerical sequence.
| |
− | | |
− | 5.3.2 Bibliography
| |
− | | |
− | A conditional section, a bibliography lists additional sources of information not referenced in
| |
− | the text. If a bibliography is included in addition to the list of references (part of the text), the
| |
− | bibliography follows the appendix(es). A bibliography is unnecessary if the references in the
| |
− | text constitute a complete list of sources of information. Bibliographic entries are usually
| |
− | arranged alphabetically by author/creator, but any logical order may be used if it is explained
| |
− | and is consistent. In print publications (or electronic reports that maintain the "page" look and
| |
− | feel), the bibliography section begins on a new page and is titled, “Bibliography.”
| |
− | | |
− | 5.3.3 List(s) of Symbols, Abbreviations, and Acronyms
| |
− | | |
− | If there are numerous symbols, abbreviations, and acronyms in a report (more than five that
| |
− | are not readily recognized as standard in the field), or if there is a chance that readers will not
| |
− | understand them, a report requires a list of all symbols, abbreviations, and acronyms with an
| |
− | explanation of each. The list of symbols, abbreviations, and acronyms begins on a new page
| |
− | in print publications. (See also 6.9, Symbols, Abbreviations, and Acronyms.) Some
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 28
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | organizations may include this section as part of the front matter to ensure that the reader is
| |
− | quickly aware of its existence.
| |
− | | |
− | 5.3.4 Glossary
| |
− | | |
− | A conditional section, the glossary is a list of terms defined and explained to facilitate a
| |
− | reader’s comprehension of the report when numerous terms requiring definition are used.
| |
− | | |
− | The glossary is part of the back matter, and glossary terms may also be defined at their first
| |
− | mention. Glossary terms are arranged in alphabetical order with each on a separate line
| |
− | followed by its definition. The glossary section, titled “Glossary,” begins on a new page in
| |
− | print publications. Some organizations may include this section as part of the front matter to
| |
− | ensure that the reader is quickly aware of its existence.
| |
− | | |
− | 5.3.5 Index
| |
− | | |
− | An index is an alphabetical listing of all major topics discussed in a report. An index is
| |
− | optional in short reports (fewer than 50 print pages), but reports of 50 pages or more usually
| |
− | contain one to help readers locate specific information. An index entry cites the page or
| |
− | location where the topic can be found, affording readers quick reference on a particular topic.
| |
− | An index may identify and locate information, indicate its nature and scope, identify related
| |
− | entries, and clarify relationships between entries. The arrangement and level of detail of the
| |
− | index are determined by the structure of the report, its target audience, and its anticipated
| |
− | uses.
| |
− | | |
− | The most common type of index for a report is the subject index in which subjects are
| |
− | presented alphabetically. Other types of indexes (for example, name index, number, and
| |
− | code index) may also be used. They are placed before the subject index in the back matter.
| |
− | | |
− | In preparing an index, the number and kind of access points (entry locations) and the
| |
− | information level of indexable matter (for example, abstract or concrete) are determined.
| |
− | | |
− | Each index entry has a heading (first element) and a locator (page, section number, or linking
| |
− | information) where information about the entry is found. Terms used as report headings are
| |
− | included in the index. The index contains all terms likely to be sought by the intended
| |
− | audience.
| |
− | | |
− | 5.3.6 Distribution List
| |
− | | |
− | If included, the distribution list follows the index (or glossary, if there is no index). The list
| |
− | indicates the complete mailing address of the individuals and organizations receiving copies
| |
− | of the report and the number of copies received. The Privacy Act of 1974 forbids federal
| |
− | agencies from listing the names and home addresses of individuals, so in a government
| |
− | report a distribution list contains business addresses only. Distribution lists provide a
| |
− | permanent record of initial distribution. In the case of classified reports, restricted-distribution
| |
− | reports, and reports containing proprietary data, such lists are extremely valuable as they can
| |
− | be used later for communicating instructions regarding handling and classification
| |
− | downgrading. A distribution list is also useful if errata are discovered and changes are issued
| |
− | to correct a report. (See also 6.12, Errata.)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 29
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 6 Presentation and Display
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | This section discusses standard methods for ensuring consistency in presentation: designing
| |
− | visual and tabular matter; formatting; presenting units, numbers, formulas, and equations;
| |
− | incorporating footnotes, endnotes, references, and bibliographic entries; preparing lists of
| |
− | symbols, abbreviations, and acronyms; formatting glossaries and indexes; and correcting
| |
− | errata after publication. Within each subsection, a distinction is made between rules
| |
− | applicable to all reports regardless of mode of publication (e.g., paper, CD-ROM, or Web)
| |
− | and rules applicable to reports published in paper form.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 6.1 Subordination
| |
− | | |
− | 6.1.1 General
| |
− | | |
− | Indicate subordination of ideas by using headings and subheadings to divide the report into
| |
− | manageable sections, call attention to main topics, and signal changes in topics. Most reports
| |
− | require no more than five levels of headings.
| |
− | | |
− | Consistency of presentation is important in showing subordinate relationships. Many reports
| |
− | use a decimal numbering system to show relationships and to simplify extensive cross-
| |
− | referencing. An alternate format for subordination uses a progression of fonts. Indicate
| |
− | headings and subheadings by bold font with initial capital letters for principal words. Indicate
| |
− | primary headings by using a larger font than that used for non-primary headings. Align
| |
− | primary and secondary headings flush with the left column of text and run in other headings
| |
− | with indented text.
| |
− | | |
− | 6.1.2 Print-Specific Guidelines
| |
− | | |
− | Begin each major section on a new page.
| |
− | | |
− | 6.1.3 Non-Print-Specific
| |
− | | |
− | In the digital environment, delineate sections in a way that is easy to understand and access,
| |
− | with full links included as required.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 6.2 Visual and Tabular Matter
| |
− | 6.2.1 General
| |
− | | |
− | Many of the data in reports are presented in figures and tables as well as in the text. Figures
| |
− | provide visual representations in the form of graphs, line drawings, diagrams, photographs,
| |
− | etc. Tables arrange large amounts of quantitative data in an ordered space. Follow these
| |
− | guidelines to ensure that figures and tables are effectively integrated with the text of a report:
| |
− | | |
− | • Mention each figure and/or table in the text.
| |
− | | |
− | • Locate each figure or table near, but never before, its first mention in the text of print
| |
− | reports. Provide an interior link between the mention of a figure or table and its place in a
| |
− | digital document if not on the same screen as the text.
| |
− | | |
− | • If a figure or table is central to the comprehension of the text, include it in the text. If
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 30
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | figures or tables provide only supplementary information, place them in an appendix (see
| |
− | also 5.3.1). Mention any material in an appendix in the text; otherwise it lacks context.
| |
− | | |
− | • Ensure that the amount of text discussion associated with each figure or table adequately
| |
− | reflects its importance to the report, the level of complexity of the information illustrated or
| |
− | tabulated, and the level of knowledge of anticipated readers. Figure legends can be used
| |
− | to provide further explanation.
| |
− | | |
− | • Number figures in the text with consecutive Arabic numbers (for example, Figure 1,
| |
− | | |
− | Figure 2). Number those pertaining only to appendices consecutively for each appendix
| |
− | (for example, Figure A1, Figure A2, Figure B1). Number tables consecutively and
| |
− | independently of figures, with Arabic numbers (for example, Table 1, Table 2,...Table 8).
| |
− | | |
− | If an appendix contains its own tables in addition to tables in the text, identify and number
| |
− | the appendix tables consecutively after the text tables (for example, Table 22, Appendix
| |
− | Table A1). If there is more than one appendix, begin table numbers again in each (for
| |
− | example, Table A1, Table A2, Table B1, Table B2).
| |
− | | |
− | • Provide a descriptive title for figures and tables to aid in comprehension and to be used in
| |
− | the front matter list of figures and tables.
| |
− | | |
− | 6.2.1.1 Print-Specific Guidelines
| |
− | | |
− | Adopt vertical rather than horizontal orientation for figures and tables so they can be viewed
| |
− | without turning a printed page sideways. If possible, redesign oversized figures or tables that
| |
− | fold in to fit a standard 8-1/2 x 11-inch page with vertical orientation. If a figure or table cannot
| |
− | be redesigned to fit on a page vertically, turn the image counterclockwise to fit the page. If a
| |
− | figure or table cannot be reduced to fit a standard page, redesign it to fit two facing pages.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 6.2.1.2 Non-Print-Specific
| |
− | | |
− | If possible, format visual material so it can be viewed on a single screen at normal resolution,
| |
− | taking into consideration the variations found in viewing items on the Web through different
| |
− | browsers.
| |
− | | |
− | 6.2.2 Figures
| |
− | | |
− | Figures (for example, graphs and charts, diagrams, photographs, schematic drawings, etc.)
| |
− | play a significant role in presenting and clarifying technical ideas. (See also Appendix A.7,
| |
− | Graphic Arts.) Normally, a figure should emphasize one main idea and show no more than is
| |
− | necessary. Figures should have informative titles (captions) that summarize the figure and,
| |
− | as needed, callouts that clearly and concisely identify each part. The figure number and title
| |
− | should appear below the figure. The title describes the content without giving background
| |
− | information, results, or comments about the figure. The placement and alignment of callouts
| |
− | should be consistent within the report. Callouts are best placed horizontally and unboxed,
| |
− | and straight lines (leaders) connect callouts to the part(s) identified in a figure. Any symbols,
| |
− | abbreviations, or acronyms that appear in figures or tables but not in the text should be
| |
− | explained in a key or defined in a caption. Identify footnotes to figures independently of text
| |
− | footnotes using superscript, lowercase letters beginning with “a” in each figure. If using
| |
− | lowercase letters leads to ambiguity, as with chemical or mathematical formulas, use a
| |
− | sequence of symbols (*, t, t, §, ||, #, **, etc.). The type of figure used depends on the type of
| |
− | information being presented: graphs show relationships among data; diagrams portray
| |
− | relationships among components; photographs realistically depict general appearance; and
| |
− | drawings emphasize essential elements and omit unnecessary details.
| |
− | | |
− | The purpose of a figure, its reproducibility, and convenience of location for report readers are
| |
− | factors in preparation. Line art, original photographs, and digital image files are preferable for
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 31
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | reproduction. Color is often necessary for comprehension. If not, its use should be carefully
| |
− | considered because of limited reproducibility as well as cost. Figure 7 shows an example of
| |
− | color substitutes: screens, crosshatching, patterned lines or similar techniques are effective
| |
− | substitutes for color.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | □I WordFrame ■ WordPerfect
| |
− | | |
− | □ MakerTeX n IslandWrite
| |
− | | |
− | □ TeX □ All others
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Software Use by Directorate
| |
− | | |
− | Figure 7: Example of graphic devices used as color substitutes
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Gauge graphic techniques to viewing capabilities. Choose symbols, letters, and lines that are
| |
− | legible at the lowest likely resolution used by readers. Position letters and numbers on graphs
| |
− | and charts so they can be easily read from the bottom and right-hand side of the graphical
| |
− | representation. When graphs represent trend curves, place tick marks along the axes to
| |
− | indicate the required degree of approximation. If highly accurate readings are needed, use
| |
− | grid lines (or, better, use a table). Crop and size photographs to show only significant details.
| |
− | To ensure legibility, the minimum acceptable line weight for drawings is 8 points (3 mm). Do
| |
− | not use graphic devices such as borders, frames, title blocks, and background tones unless
| |
− | their use significantly improves clarity.
| |
− | | |
− | 6.2.3 Tables
| |
− | | |
− | 6.2.3.1 General
| |
− | | |
− | Tables present detailed facts or statistics concisely in row-and-column format. A formal table
| |
− | has a table number and title placed above the data. The title describes the content without
| |
− | giving background information, results, or comments about the table. The first principle words
| |
− | of the title should reflect the content of the first column. The row head and column heads
| |
− | identify the tabulated data that appear in the body or cells of the table.
| |
− | | |
− | Identify footnotes to tables independently of text footnotes using superscript, lowercase
| |
− | letters beginning with “a” in each table. If using lowercase letters leads to ambiguity, as with
| |
− | chemical or mathematical formulas, use a sequence of symbols (*, t, t, §, ||, #, **, etc.).
| |
− | Assign footnote letters in left-to-right and top-to-bottom order; place footnotes below the
| |
− | bottom line of the table. If a table or data in a table was obtained from a reference source,
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 32
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | include a source line that identifies the reference. (See also 5.2.7, References.) Figure 8
| |
− | shows the parts of a table.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Table 3. Table Number and Title.
| |
− | | |
− | Stub Head
| |
− | | |
− | Column Head 3
| |
− | | |
− | Column Head b
| |
− | | |
− | Row Head
| |
− | | |
− | Data
| |
− | | |
− | Data
| |
− | | |
− | Data
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Source Line:
| |
− | | |
− | 3 Footnote to table appears here.
| |
− | b Footnote to table appears here.
| |
− | | |
− | Figure 8: Nomenclature for the parts of a table
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Indicate units of measurement in the table title, the column heads, or in a note. If presented in
| |
− | the column heads, place units and symbols in parentheses and do not repeat them in the
| |
− | columns. If data are unavailable for a particular cell, use a dash to fill the vacancy.
| |
− | | |
− | Use horizontal rules to separate a table from the title and row heading and column heads
| |
− | from the body of the table. Use vertical rules to separate columns if needed to ease
| |
− | reading/viewing of tabular material.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 6.2.3.2 Print-Specific Guidelines
| |
− | | |
− | To enable print presentation of tables with multiple columns, it may be necessary to continue
| |
− | tabular columns on successive pages. If adopting this approach, repeat the table number and
| |
− | title, row head, and column head and note the continuation. Do not carry a table over unless
| |
− | at least two rows or columns will be included. Do not display a row across more than one
| |
− | page.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 6.2.3.3 Non-Print-Specific
| |
− | | |
− | Format tables so they can be viewed on a single screen at normal resolution, taking into
| |
− | consideration the variations found in viewing items on the Web through different browsers.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 6.3 Presentation Format
| |
− | | |
− | The physical appearance of a report, both text and graphics, constitutes format. The goal of
| |
− | any format is to enhance readability and comprehension by providing visual uniformity and a
| |
− | consistent subordination of ideas. Decisions about report formats should be based on
| |
− | principles of graphic design, keeping in mind format choices may be limited by contract
| |
− | specifications, in-house requirements, or the equipment used for publication or display. (See
| |
− | also Appendix A.7, Graphic Arts.)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 33
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 6.3.1 General
| |
− | | |
− | 6.3.1.1 Line Length
| |
− | | |
− | Ragged right margins make reading easier. Avoid excessively ragged right margins by using
| |
− | a standard and a minimum line length. The minimum line length is 2 to 3 12-point characters
| |
− | (8 to 13 mm) shorter than the standard line length. A line ends with the word falling nearest
| |
− | the standard length, but does not exceed the standard length by more than two characters.
| |
− | For example, a single column of text intended for continuous reading (as opposed to
| |
− | reference material) may be presented in standard lines equivalent to 40 to 43 picas (169 to
| |
− | 182 mm) wide. To minimize ragged right margins, a recommended minimum line length is
| |
− | equivalent to 38 picas (161 mm). If a report is presented in double-column format, the image
| |
− | area includes the space necessary to separate the columns, 1 to 2 12-point characters (4 to
| |
− | 8 mm). A recommended minimum line length for double columns is 20 12-point characters
| |
− | (85 mm) per column with 2 additional 12-point characters (8 mm) between each column, a
| |
− | total of 42 12-point characters (178 mm).
| |
− | | |
− | 6.3.1.2 Font Choice
| |
− | | |
− | A font size and style should be clearly legible.
| |
− | | |
− | For report text, including mathematical notations, a 10- or 12-point (4- or 5-mm) serif font is
| |
− | the most comfortable font for readers. Smaller sizes can be used for non-text matter (for
| |
− | example, footnotes and indexes); however, 8 points (3 mm) is the smallest acceptable size
| |
− | for non-text matter.
| |
− | | |
− | The availability and appearance of specialized characters for symbols, formulas, and
| |
− | equations are important considerations in selecting a font.
| |
− | | |
− | 6.3.2 Print-Specific
| |
− | | |
− | 6.3.2.1 Image Area
| |
− | | |
− | The space allotted on a page or screen for textual, visual, or tabular matter is the image area.
| |
− | Observing a standard image area ensures the information on a page will not be lost during
| |
− | printing and binding. The normal image area on U.S. standard paper that is 8-1/2 by 11
| |
− | inches (216 by 279 mm) is 7-1/8 by 9-3/16 inches (182 by 233 mm) or, in type-setting
| |
− | terminology, 43 by 55 picas. The image area includes headers and footers, if used, and page
| |
− | numbers. For lead pages (for example, stand-alone material, such as the foreword or table of
| |
− | contents, and the first page of a chapter) subtract 1 inch (25 mm) from the top of the image
| |
− | area.
| |
− | | |
− | 6.3.2.2 Margins
| |
− | | |
− | Margins set off the image area, which includes headers and footers. Although they are
| |
− | proportional, margins are not equal on all sides. By printing convention, the top margin is the
| |
− | narrowest, usually 1 inch (25 mm), and the outer margin is wider. The bottom margin is wider
| |
− | than both top and outer margins. To accommodate binding, the inner or gutter margin is the
| |
− | widest. The default margins for most word processing software observe these printing
| |
− | conventions.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 34
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 6.3.2.3 Paper and Ink
| |
− | | |
− | Use U.S. standard size (8-1/2 by 11 inches (216 by 279 mm)) acid-free paper to produce
| |
− | paper copies of scientific and technical reports. Color, smoothness, and weight are factors in
| |
− | selecting paper. Type is most easily read against an off-white, uncoated stock; however,
| |
− | halftone illustrations (photographs) printed on coated paper are superior to those printed on
| |
− | uncoated. To ensure legibility and reproducibility, use black ink.
| |
− | | |
− | 6.3.2.4 Printing Equipment
| |
− | | |
− | A laser or laser-quality printer with a minimum 300-dpi (dots per inch) resolution produces
| |
− | acceptable camera-ready copy for text and line work. If photographs or high-resolution
| |
− | graphics are included electronically in a report, use a printer with 600-dpi or higher resolution
| |
− | to print them.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 6.4 Designation
| |
− | | |
− | 6.4.1 General
| |
− | | |
− | For ease of use and reference, delimit and uniquely identify segments of a report. For
| |
− | traditional paper reports, the segments are usually pages. For reports published in digital
| |
− | form, they may be pages, but are more likely to be paragraphs or screens.
| |
− | | |
− | Once the segments of a report have been determined, use consecutive Arabic numbers to
| |
− | designate them. When reproducing appendix information from another source, retain the
| |
− | designation of the original source in addition to designation for inclusion in the appendix. If a
| |
− | report is divided into sections or chapters because of its length or scope, number the text,
| |
− | exclusive of front matter and back matter, sequentially from one part to the next.
| |
− | | |
− | 6.4.2 Print-Specific
| |
− | | |
− | Place page numbers in the same place on each page (for example, bottom right) or in a
| |
− | consistent place on mirror-image pages (for example, upper outer corner). Do not place
| |
− | hyphens, parentheses, or other punctuation marks around page numbers.
| |
− | | |
− | Number front matter with consecutive lowercase roman numerals. Do not show page
| |
− | numbers on the cover or title page, but consider the title page as page i. Begin a table of
| |
− | contents on a new odd-numbered right-hand page.
| |
− | | |
− | Begin the text of each volume of a multivolume report on a new page 1.
| |
− | | |
− | The structure and nature of a report govern the optional use of headers and footers in the
| |
− | text. Do not place headers and footers on lead pages, on the first page of the table of
| |
− | contents, or in the preface. Use running headers to help locate information in long, complex
| |
− | reports.
| |
− | | |
− | When running headers appear on right-hand pages, use the last text heading on the page as
| |
− | the header. When running headers appear on left-hand pages, use the first text heading to
| |
− | appear as the header. If using section titles as headings, use them as running headers
| |
− | throughout the section. Running headers used for a section of notes in the back matter
| |
− | should show inclusive page numbers where the relevant references are found (for example,
| |
− | Notes to Pages 23-31).
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 35
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 6.5 Units and Numbers
| |
− | | |
− | Present standard units of measurement clearly, concisely, and consistently in reports. The
| |
− | preferred standard for units is the International System of Units (SI). If another system is
| |
− | used, the corresponding SI units may appear in parentheses. If two systems of measurement
| |
− | are used, indicate the systems in the “Methods, Assumptions, and Procedures” section and in
| |
− | a statement at the beginning of the list of symbols, abbreviations, and acronyms. (See also
| |
− | 5.2.3, Methods, Assumptions, and Procedures.)
| |
− | | |
− | Abbreviate units used with specific numbers (for example, 3.7 m) except where a potential
| |
− | exists for misinterpretation; otherwise, spell out units. For SI units derived from proper
| |
− | names, show the symbols in initial capital letters (for example, Hz and N); use lowercase
| |
− | letters for units that are spelled out (for example, hertz and newtons). Write SI symbols in
| |
− | singular form; IEEE/ASTM SI-10-2002, American National Standard for Use of the
| |
− | International System of Units (SI): The Modern Metric System, provides detailed information
| |
− | on using SI symbols and units.
| |
− | | |
− | Always use Arabic numbers to express units of measurement and time in mathematical
| |
− | expressions, decimals, percentages, and proportions. For other expressions, the following
| |
− | apply:
| |
− | | |
− | • If a sentence contains only one number and it is greater than nine, indicate it as a
| |
− | numeral; if a number is nine or less, spell it out.
| |
− | | |
− | • Always spell out a number at the beginning of a sentence.
| |
− | | |
− | • Use numerals for a group of two or more numbers if one of them is 10 or greater (for
| |
− | example, a capacitor having 3 leads, 2 pairs of controls, and 12 settings).
| |
− | | |
− | • The same guidelines apply to ordinal numbers, but treat ordinals and cardinals separately
| |
− | if they appear together (for example, the 5th and 14th groups, containing six and seven
| |
− | items, respectively).
| |
− | | |
− | • Use Arabic numbers for all numbering systems (page and section, table, figure, and
| |
− | reference numbers), except for roman-numeral pagination of front matter (for example,
| |
− | page iii).
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 6.6 Formulas and Equations
| |
− | | |
− | Present formulas and equations in sentence form and punctuate them for clarity and
| |
− | consistency; however, do not begin a sentence with a formula or equation.
| |
− | | |
− | Clarify complicated mathematical formulas and derivations by defining symbols below the
| |
− | formula or derivation or as is customary in the discipline, relating equations to one another
| |
− | and describing the physical reality represented by the mathematics. Chemical symbols need
| |
− | not be defined unless the author/creator chooses to do so for clarification. Use marginal
| |
− | notes to identify modifications of symbols (for example, prime marks) and to distinguish
| |
− | between the letter “O” and “0” (zero); the letter “I” and the number “1”; the letter “x” and the
| |
− | multiplication sign (x). Clearly indicate superscripts and subscripts.
| |
− | | |
− | Include brief formulas and equations as part of the text if the formula or equation fits on one
| |
− | line. If a formula or equation is displayed set off from the text, center or indent it, depending
| |
− | on its length. For consistent presentation and cross-referencing in a report with extensive
| |
− | notation, display and number all equations. Italicize formulas and equations, whether
| |
− | included as part of the text or displayed.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 36
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Enclose equation numbers in parentheses at the right-hand margin with a minimum of
| |
− | 1/4 inch between the last term in the equation and the equation number. Place the equation
| |
− | number on the same line of a single-line equation and on the last line of a multi-line equation.
| |
− | | |
− | If a long formula or equation does not fit on a single line, break it before an operational sign
| |
− | (plus, minus, times, integral, etc.) or after an expression enclosed with parentheses, brackets,
| |
− | etc.
| |
− | | |
− | Use an extra line space between the lines when a formula or equation is carried over
| |
− | because of its length. A number of computer software packages supporting the presentation
| |
− | of equations automatically provide correct line spacing. An example of a multi-line equation
| |
− | split to fit on a page is shown in Figure 9.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Jo Jo E(n ^ ) N ^ 1 '^ dl l
| |
− | | |
− | -f/.V,
| |
− | | |
− | rJF cJN;
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | rJF rJN/ _ c)¥ dN/ _ £ M ( d FdN/
| |
− | | |
− | 0 j 0 L dll d£, X \df| dll
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ~ /3M dF XT \ dM dF
| |
− | 35*5/ '\^T 1 dr, N 7 34 «; '
| |
− | | |
− | + K 2 (3K x - K|)MFN/+- K 2 (k|- 1)FN/
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | - 3K 2 K£MFN,+ k 2 k|m 3 fn /
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | dn d£
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Figure 9: Sample multi-line equation with extra space before and after
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Define chemical symbols if definition enhances their comprehension. Use close spacing for
| |
− | chemical symbols, numbers, or line bonds in a formula. Chemical equations may be run in or
| |
− | displayed set off from text. Use roman (English) type rather than italics to form chemical
| |
− | symbols. If displayed, they should be numbered in sequence, and the equation numbers
| |
− | placed to the right of the reaction. Number chemical equations consecutively and
| |
− | independently of mathematical equations.
| |
− | | |
− | If a chemical equation is too long to fit on one line, break it after the arrow. Align the first
| |
− | element of the runover line with the last element of the preceding line. Leave extra line
| |
− | spacing between the lowest part of the first line and the highest part of the next line. An
| |
− | example of a chemical equation broken after the arrow is shown in Figure 10:
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Co(NH 3 ) 6 3+ + 6H 3 Cr ^
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Co(H 2 0) 6 3+ + 6NH 4 ^
| |
− | | |
− | K — 1O 20
| |
− | | |
− | C
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Figure 10: Sample chemical equation spread over two lines
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 37
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 6.7 Footnotes or Endnotes
| |
− | | |
− | Include footnotes or endnotes in a report only to clarify information in the text; keep them as
| |
− | brief as possible. To avoid preparing footnotes or endnotes, incorporate material into the text
| |
− | by enclosing it in parentheses or placing it in a separate paragraph.
| |
− | | |
− | Use superscript Arabic numbers to key notes to the portion of the text they clarify. Number
| |
− | notes consecutively through the text; place footnotes at the bottom of the page on which each
| |
− | occurs and place endnotes at the end of the section of text they clarify. If a footnote runs
| |
− | longer than its page margin, complete the footnote at the bottom of the subsequent page,
| |
− | preceding any footnote(s) for that page. If a footnote clarifies tabular information, use a
| |
− | superscript sequence of lowercase letters or symbols to avoid confusion with text footnotes.
| |
− | (See also 6.2.3, Tables.)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 6.8 References and Bibliographic Entries
| |
− | | |
− | Indent the first line of a reference and align subsequent lines flush with the left margin. Align
| |
− | entries in a bibliography flush left without paragraph indentation. If a bibliographic entry runs
| |
− | longer than a single line, uniformly indent subsequent runover lines. Alternatively, maintain a
| |
− | flush left placement and enter a blank line between bibliographic entries.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 6.9 Symbols, Abbreviations, and Acronyms
| |
− | 6.9.1 General
| |
− | | |
− | Spell out symbols, abbreviations, and acronyms at their first use in the text to ensure that
| |
− | readers understand them. However, do not define standard mathematical notation, chemical
| |
− | symbols (unless needed for clarification; see: 6.6), and known abbreviations of measurement
| |
− | unless the potential exists for misinterpretation. Write out an acronym the first time it is used
| |
− | in the text, and include it in a list of symbols, abbreviations, and acronyms. Use symbols that
| |
− | are standard in the discipline of the report. Appendix A, Selected Annotated Bibliography,
| |
− | | |
− | A.6, Standards and Symbols, includes standards for symbols used in many disciplines. If no
| |
− | standard has been established for a concept, consult related scientific or technical literature
| |
− | for a symbol in general use. When they occur in lists, present symbols, abbreviations, and
| |
− | acronyms in descending order, as follows:
| |
− | | |
− | • Numbers
| |
− | | |
− | • Roman (English) alphabet capital letters
| |
− | | |
− | • Roman (English) alphabet lowercase letters
| |
− | | |
− | • Greek alphabet capital letters
| |
− | | |
− | • Greek alphabet lowercase letters
| |
− | | |
− | • Subscripts
| |
− | | |
− | • Superscripts
| |
− | | |
− | • Special notes
| |
− | | |
− | If a symbol, abbreviation, or acronym has more than one definition, separate the explanations
| |
− | by a semicolon and explain each definition at its first use in the report.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 38
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 6.9.2 Print-Specific
| |
− | | |
− | Display symbols, abbreviations, and acronyms and their definitions in two columns with the
| |
− | abbreviations and acronyms listed in alpha-numeric order and aligned with the left margin.
| |
− | Begin each entry on a new line, followed in the second column by its definition. Leave
| |
− | adequate space between the longest symbol, abbreviation, or acronym and its definition and
| |
− | align the rest of the entries in the list(s) accordingly.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 6.10 Glossary Entries
| |
− | | |
− | Arrange glossary entries in alphabetical order and align them with the left margin. Uniformly
| |
− | indent subsequent lines or maintain flush left with the left margin and enter a blank line
| |
− | between glossary entries. Begin each definition with a capital letter and end it with a period.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 6.11 Index Entries
| |
− | | |
− | 6.11.1 General
| |
− | | |
− | Always use lower case unless an entry begins with a proper name; indent entries uniformly
| |
− | for each level of modification. Indent runover lines deeper than the deepest subentry.
| |
− | | |
− | 6.11.2 Print-Specific
| |
− | | |
− | It is customary to arrange index entries on printed pages so they appear single-spaced in a
| |
− | two- or three-column format.
| |
− | | |
− | 6.11.3 Non-Print-Specific
| |
− | | |
− | Best practice is to provide links between index terms and what they reference.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 6.12 Errata
| |
− | 6.12.1 General
| |
− | | |
− | If errors severe enough to cause misunderstanding are discovered too late for correction prior
| |
− | to the distribution of a report, send an errata sheet or update that identifies the report and the
| |
− | error(s) to initial and subsequent recipients.
| |
− | | |
− | Identify an error in the text by line; identify an error in a formula or an equation by number
| |
− | and the correction noted. The following form is used for corrections:
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page
| |
− | | |
− | Reads
| |
− | | |
− | Should Read
| |
− | | |
− | 37, line 5
| |
− | | |
− | cosine of the angle
| |
− | | |
− | sine of the angle
| |
− | | |
− | Paragraph
| |
− | | |
− | Reads
| |
− | | |
− | Should Read
| |
− | | |
− | 5.12, line 2
| |
− | | |
− | cosine of the angle
| |
− | | |
− | sine of the angle
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 39
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 6.12.2 Print-Specific
| |
− | | |
− | For printed reports, insert the errata sheet immediately following the cover.
| |
− | | |
− | 6.12.3 Non-Print-Specific
| |
− | | |
− | When errors are corrected in a digital environment, notice of the version being accessed
| |
− | should be included in the metadata.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 40
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Appendix A
| |
− | | |
− | Selected Annotated Bibliography
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | (This appendix is not part of ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005, Scientific and Technical Reports - Preparation, Presentation
| |
− | and Preservation. It is included for information only.)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | A.1. General
| |
− | | |
− | This annotated bibliography is intended to help authors and editors organize, design, and publish
| |
− | reports. The bibliography is extensive but not exhaustive. The absence of a particular publication is
| |
− | no reflection of its quality or usefulness. The list is simply a starting point for the user to begin to build
| |
− | a professional reference collection or consult a particular source to answer a question. Using a
| |
− | particular source depends on factors such as personal preference, subject matter, and the specific
| |
− | needs of the user.
| |
− | | |
− | The bibliography is divided into seven categories:
| |
− | | |
− | • A.2: Writing, usage, style, grammar, and English language dictionaries
| |
− | | |
− | • A.3: Style manuals and guides
| |
− | | |
− | • A.4: Specialized dictionaries, encyclopedias, and handbooks
| |
− | | |
− | • A.5: Technical writing materials
| |
− | | |
− | • A.6: Standards and symbols
| |
− | | |
− | • A.7: Library reference materials
| |
− | | |
− | • A.8: Graphic arts
| |
− | | |
− | • A.9: Typography and publication design
| |
− | | |
− | Reasonable attempts were made to identify and include the classic or standard sources for each
| |
− | category. Several sources and numerous individuals were consulted in compiling the bibliography.
| |
− | Each citation was verified for correctness, most recent edition, and availability. To the best of our
| |
− | knowledge, no out-of-print sources were included.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | A.2. Writing, Usage, Style, Grammar, and English-Language Dictionaries
| |
− | | |
− | Barzun, Jacques, Simple and Direct: A Rhetoric for Writers, rev. ed., New York: Harper and Row, 1994.
| |
− | | |
− | A thorough discussion of faults in prose and their remedies. Proceeds from word choice through sequence
| |
− | and linkage, tone, meaning, structure, and revision.
| |
− | | |
− | Bernstein, Theodore M., Bernstein's Reverse Dictionary, 2nd ed., New York: Times Books, 1988.
| |
− | | |
− | Essential for the word-conscious reader and writer. Takes you from definition to word.
| |
− | | |
− | Bernstein, Theodore M., The Careful Writer: A Modern Guide to English Usage, New York: Atheneum, 1965.
| |
− | | |
− | An alphabetically arranged list of usages, good and bad, with a discussion of why they should be embraced,
| |
− | tolerated, or shunned. A guide for manuscript editors.
| |
− | | |
− | Bernstein, Theodore M., Miss Thistlebottom’s Hobgoblins: The Careful Writer’s Guide to the Taboos, Bugbears,
| |
− | and Outmoded Rules of English Usage, New York: Simon and Schuster, rev. ed., 1991.
| |
− | | |
− | A discussion of invalid and outmoded rules commonly applied to prose and usage. A guide for both writers
| |
− | and editors.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 41
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | DeVries, Mary A., The New American Dictionary of Abbreviations, New York: Penguin Books, 1991.
| |
− | | |
− | Provides extensive coverage of standard abbreviations and their definitions.
| |
− | | |
− | Ebbitt, Wilma R. and David R. Ebbitt, Index to English, 8th ed., NY: Oxford University Press, 1990.
| |
− | | |
− | A comprehensive reference book that includes articles on grammar, parts of speech, sentence structure,
| |
− | diction, punctuation, mechanics, logic, rhetoric, and style. Arranged alphabetically.
| |
− | | |
− | Follett, Wilson, Modem American Usage: A Guide, revised by Erik Wensberg, New York: Hill and Wang, 1998.
| |
− | | |
− | A dictionary of usage containing essays on a number of questions of concern to authors and editors.
| |
− | | |
− | Fowler, H. W., A Dictionary of Modem English Usage, 2nd ed., revised by Ernest Gowers, New York: Greenwich
| |
− | House, 1991.
| |
− | | |
− | A classic work on English usage offering guidance to both writers and editors. There is a 3rd edition edited by
| |
− | R. W. Burchfield, The New Fowler’s Modern English Usage, 3rd ed., Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1996.
| |
− | | |
− | Hodges, John C. and Cheryl Glenn, Hodge’s Harbrace College Handbook, 15th ed., NY: Heinle, 2003.
| |
− | | |
− | A standard college grammar book. A comprehensive, yet concise, summary of grammar and usage.
| |
− | | |
− | Keene, Michael L., and Katherine H. Adams, Easy Access: with APA Update, 3rd ed., New York: McGraw-Hill,
| |
− | 2002 .
| |
− | | |
− | An excellent grammar handbook. Has sections on "Common Writing Problems" and "The Basics From A to
| |
− | Z." A handy reference to questions about grammar or word usage.
| |
− | | |
− | Mager, Nathan H., and Sylvia K. Mager, Prentice-Hall Encyclopedic Dictionary of English Usage, 2nd ed.,
| |
− | Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1992.
| |
− | | |
− | A combination dictionary, grammar guide, and style manual. Contains over 15,000 entries listed alphabetically
| |
− | and gives accepted rules, styles, and usage.
| |
− | | |
− | McArthur, Tom, Ed., Concise Oxford Companion to the English Language, New York, NY: Oxford University
| |
− | Press, 1998.
| |
− | | |
− | Short articles cover virtually every aspect of language such as grammar, literary terms, linguistics, rhetoric,
| |
− | style, sexist language, child language acquisition, and the history of the language. Covers the period from the
| |
− | Roman era to the 1990s.
| |
− | | |
− | O'Hare, Frank, and Robert Funk, The Modern Writer's Handbook, 5th ed., Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 2000.
| |
− | Comprehensive in coverage. Includes a full treatment of writing and research processes; focused on user-
| |
− | friendly features to promote reader self-help in writing and revision.
| |
− | | |
− | Roget’s International Thesaurus, 6th ed., revised by Robert L. Chapman, New York: HarperCollins, 2001.
| |
− | | |
− | A classic dictionary of synonyms that indexes relationships among words. A guide for word choice by authors
| |
− | and editors.
| |
− | | |
− | Strong, William, English Matters!, Danbury, Conn.: Grolier Educational, 2000.
| |
− | | |
− | A nontechnical resource for a variety of questions related to the English language. Presented in 10 (small)
| |
− | volumes. Introduces, defines, and discusses keywords and phrases relevant to the study of English. Arranged
| |
− | alphabetically. Includes spelling and vocabulary, grammar and usage, thinking skills, mechanics and
| |
− | punctuation, research, test-taking, and words commonly confused.
| |
− | | |
− | Strunk, William, Jr., and E. B. White, The Elements of Style, 4th ed., Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 1999.
| |
− | | |
− | A short classic offering practical advice on achieving a clear writing style. A good resource for both authors
| |
− | and editors.
| |
− | | |
− | Pickett, Joseph, ed., The American Heritage Dictionary, 4th ed., Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 2001.
| |
− | | |
− | A standard American dictionary that provides a thorough discussion of usage.
| |
− | | |
− | Trimmer, Joseph F., Writing with a Purpose, 14th ed., Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 2003.
| |
− | | |
− | A standard college writing book. Covers various elements of the writing process including planning, revising,
| |
− | paragraph development, sentence patterns, diction, and tone and style.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 42
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Truss, Lynne, Eats, Shoots & Leaves: The Zero-Tolerance Approach to Punctuation, New York: Gotham Books,
| |
− | 2004.
| |
− | | |
− | A sometimes hilarious book that definitively makes the case that punctuation matters and tells the reader how
| |
− | to ensure that he or she is doing the job properly.
| |
− | | |
− | Webster’s 11th New Collegiate Dictionary, Springfield, Mass.: Merriam-Webster, 2003.
| |
− | | |
− | Prepared after the parent work, the collegiate represents the later thinking of the editors on the principles of
| |
− | word division and frequently departs from the divisions given in the unabridged version.
| |
− | | |
− | Webster’s Third New International Dictionary of the English Language, Unabridged, Springfield, Mass.: Merriam-
| |
− | Webster, 1993.
| |
− | | |
− | A standard dictionary for the spelling of English words and a basic reference for any editorial office or library.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | A.3. Style Manuals and Guides
| |
− | | |
− | Anderson, James D. Guidelines for Indexes and Related Information Retrieval Devices. Bethesda (MD): National
| |
− | Information Standards Organization; 1997. Report No: NISO TR02 1997. ISBN: 1-880124-36-X. Available from:
| |
− | http ://www. n iso ,o rq/sta nd a rds/resources/tr02 .pdf
| |
− | | |
− | Cathcart, M. E., STI Handbook: Guidelines for Producing, Using, and Managing Scientific and Technical
| |
− | Information in the Department of the Navy (A Handbook for Navy Scientists and Engineers on the Use of
| |
− | Scientific and Technical Information), San Diego, Calif.: Office of Naval Technology, 1992.
| |
− | | |
− | Provides specific guidelines for U.S. Navy authors on preparing reports. Prepared for the Office of Naval
| |
− | Technology by the Naval Command, Control and Ocean Surveillance Center, RDT&E Division,
| |
− | | |
− | San Diego, CA.
| |
− | | |
− | Huth, Edward J., Ed., Council of Biology Editors, Scientific Style and Format, 6th ed., New York: Cambridge
| |
− | University Press, 1994.
| |
− | | |
− | A style manual including sections on grammar, writing style, and indexing. Especially useful for authors of
| |
− | works in special fields of biology. Provides guidance on the treatment of mathematical and statistical
| |
− | information and abbreviations.
| |
− | | |
− | Dodd, Janet S., Ed. The ACS Style Guide. Washington, D.C.: American Chemical Society, 1997.
| |
− | | |
− | A comprehensive description of the scientific literature and its production, including its economic-legal nexus.
| |
− | | |
− | Most importantly, a compendium of guides to editorial decisions involving a large array of the typographic
| |
− | expression of scientific concepts.
| |
− | | |
− | Hansen, Wallace R., Ed., Suggestions to Authors of the Reports of the United States Geological Survey, 7th ed.,
| |
− | S/N 024-001-03010-1, Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1991.
| |
− | | |
− | A guide providing detailed information on specific geological expressions and references to works in the field.
| |
− | Contains a short grammar section.
| |
− | | |
− | Harvard Law Review et al., The Bluebook: A Uniform System of Citation, 17th ed., Cambridge, Mass.: The
| |
− | Harvard Law Review Association, 2000.
| |
− | | |
− | Provides guidance for legal writing. Gives citation form for cases, statutes, government documents, books,
| |
− | and other printed materials.
| |
− | | |
− | Howell, John Bruce, Style Manuals of the English-Speaking World: A Guide, Phoenix: Oryx Press, 1983.
| |
− | Describes 231 style manuals and guides of over 5 pages in length. Divides them into general, subject (20
| |
− | disciplines), manuals and styles related to disabled people, and guidelines on avoiding sexist language.
| |
− | | |
− | ISO Technical Committee ISO/TC 184, Industrial automation systems and integration, Subcommittee SC4,
| |
− | Industrial data, SC4 Supplementary directives - Rules for the structure and drafting of SC4 standards for
| |
− | industrial data, ISO TC184/SC4/SC4 N1217:2001(E), 2001-11-01. Available from: http://www.td 84-
| |
− | sc4.org/SC4 Open/SC4 Standards Developers lnfo/Files/SC4N1217.pdf
| |
− | | |
− | This document was developed to provide guidelines for the content, layout, and style for the standards
| |
− | developed by ISO TC184/SC4. Many of the recommendations are equally applicable to technical reports.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 43
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Li, Xia; and Nancy B. Crane, Electronic Styles: A Guide to Citing Electronic Information, Medford, N.J.:
| |
− | Information Today, 1996.
| |
− | | |
− | Presents basic forms for the kinds of information being cited and recommends the types of elements to be
| |
− | included and the order of their presentation. Covers citations of full-text and bibliographic databases,
| |
− | electronic conferences and bulletin board services, electronic mail, and computer programs. Generally follows
| |
− | APA style with some modifications.
| |
− | | |
− | National Information Standards Organization, Bibliographic References, ANSI/NISO Z39.29-2005, Bethesda,
| |
− | Maryland: NISO, 2005.
| |
− | | |
− | NISO standard providing rules, guidelines, and examples for the creation of bibliographic references to
| |
− | numerous types of print, audiovisual, and electronic materials, both published and unpublished, arranged in
| |
− | fifteen broad categories.
| |
− | | |
− | Rubens, Philip, Ed., Science and Technical Writing: A Manual of Style, 2nd ed., New York: Routledge, 2001.
| |
− | | |
− | A comprehensive style guide that covers science, technical, medical, corporate, and business writing; graphic
| |
− | and electronic design; and training and education.
| |
− | | |
− | Skillin, Marjorie E., Robert M. Gay, etal., Words into Type, 3rd ed., Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1974.
| |
− | Covers the entire publishing process from writing through printing and binding. Includes particularly useful
| |
− | sections on grammar, word usage, and style. Extensive coverage of typography.
| |
− | | |
− | Slade, Carole, Form and Style: Theses, Reports, Term Papers, 12th ed., Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 2002.
| |
− | | |
− | Covers such topics as the elements of a thesis, style and usage, and typing the paper. Provides guidance on
| |
− | quotations, bibliographic format, and references.
| |
− | | |
− | Swanson, Ellen, Mathematics into Type: Copyediting and Proofreading of Mathematics for Editorial Assistants
| |
− | and Authors, rev. ed., Providence, R.I.: American Mathematical Society, 1999.
| |
− | | |
− | Includes instructions on all phases of producing a book or an article in the field of mathematics. Covers such
| |
− | elements as the preparation and submission of a manuscript, editing and marking, design and typesetting,
| |
− | proofreading, and page makeup.
| |
− | | |
− | U.S. Government Printing Office, Style Manual, 2000 rev. ed., S/N 2100-0068, Washington, D.C.: U.S.
| |
− | Government Printing Office, 2000.
| |
− | | |
− | A general style guide for preparing government publications. Contains details not found elsewhere regarding
| |
− | treatment of foreign currency, political divisions, plant and insect names, and other specialized expressions.
| |
− | | |
− | University of Chicago Press, The Chicago Manual of Style, 15th ed., Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2003.
| |
− | A widely used and referenced style manual. Includes detailed sections on mathematical copy, treatment of
| |
− | foreign languages, preparation of indexes, and distinctive treatment of words.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | A.4. Specialized Dictionaries, Encyclopedias, and Handbooks
| |
− | | |
− | American Society for Testing and Materials, Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Philadelphia: American Society
| |
− | for Testing and Materials, annual serial.
| |
− | | |
− | The official standard of the ASTM. A reference for the definitions used in the field of testing and materials.
| |
− | | |
− | Anderson, Kenneth N., Lois E. Anderson, and Walter D. Glanze, Eds., Mosby's Medical, Nursing, and Allied
| |
− | Health Dictionary, 6th ed., New York: Elsevier Science, 2001.
| |
− | | |
− | Provides large, easy-to-read type; strict alphabetical organization; comprehensive definitions for major
| |
− | diseases, disorders, and procedures; detailed drug entries; and the Color Atlas of Human Anatomy. Offers
| |
− | full-color illustrations throughout. Also gives language-translation guides; a tabular atlas of human anatomy
| |
− | and physiology; lists of leading health problems; and guidelines for nutrition, pediatrics, pharmacology,
| |
− | communicable diseases, and nursing diagnoses.
| |
− | | |
− | Considine, Douglas M., Ed., Van Nostrand’s Scientific Encyclopedia, 8th ed., New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold,
| |
− | 1995.
| |
− | | |
− | An alphabetical arrangement of terms used in science and technology. A useful work for both the scientist and
| |
− | the lay person. Contains approximately 16,500 entries.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 44
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Dirckx, John H., Ed., Stedman's Concise Medical Dictionary for the Health Professions, 4th ed., Baltimore:
| |
− | Williams & Wilkins, 2001.
| |
− | | |
− | Abridged counterpart to Stedman's Medical Dictionary (see below). Emphasizes allied health sciences. Offers
| |
− | pronunciations for every defined term, images, tables, and appendices.
| |
− | | |
− | Dorland’s Illustrated Medical Dictionary, 30th ed., New York: Elsevier Science, 2003.
| |
− | | |
− | A traditional source for checking spelling and meaning of medical and health-related terms.
| |
− | | |
− | Hampel, Clifford A., and Gessner G. Hawley, Glossary of Chemical Terms, 2nd ed., New York: Van Nostrand
| |
− | Reinhold, 1982.
| |
− | | |
− | Provides extensive coverage of chemical terminology.
| |
− | | |
− | Hawley’s Condensed Chemical Dictionary, 14th ed., revised by Richard S. Lewis, Sr., New York: Van Nostrand
| |
− | Reinhold, 2002.
| |
− | | |
− | A detailed reference work on the chemical industry. Contains technical descriptions of chemicals, raw
| |
− | materials, and processes; definitions of chemical compounds, phenomena, and terminology; and identification
| |
− | of trademarked products and their manufacturers.
| |
− | | |
− | James, Robert C., and Glenn James, Mathematics Dictionary, 5th ed., New York: Chapman and Hall, 1992.
| |
− | Defines mathematical terms and phrases; includes tables, formulas, mathematical symbols, and vocabularies
| |
− | giving English equivalents of mathematical terms in French, German, Russian, and Spanish.
| |
− | | |
− | Kirk-Othmer Encyclopedia of Chemical Technology, New York: John Wiley and Sons, 1999.
| |
− | | |
− | Contains comprehensive review of major individual chemicals, classes of chemicals, and chemical processes
| |
− | and technologies.
| |
− | | |
− | Lide, David R., Ed., CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 84th ed., Boca Raton, Fla.: CRC Press, 2003.
| |
− | | |
− | A classic handbook of chemistry and physics. Includes mathematical and chemical tables and tables of
| |
− | physical constants and organic and inorganic compounds.
| |
− | | |
− | The Oxford Dictionary for Scientific Writers and Editors, New York: Oxford University Press, 1991.
| |
− | | |
− | A clear and concise style guide for the publication of scientific information. Covers physics, chemistry, botany,
| |
− | zoology, biochemistry, genetics, immunology, microbiology, astronomy, mathematics, and computer science.
| |
− | Gives guidance on spellings, punctuation, abbreviations, prefixes and suffixes, units and quantities, and
| |
− | symbols.
| |
− | | |
− | Parker, Sybil P., et al., Eds., McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Scientific and Technical Terms, 6th ed., New York:
| |
− | McGraw-Hill, 2003.
| |
− | | |
− | A dictionary defining over 100,000 terms from the sciences and engineering fields. Entries do not include
| |
− | syllabification, pronunciation, or etymological information. Includes several useful appendixes. See also
| |
− | Parker, Sybil P., et al., Eds., McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Bioscience, 2nd ed., New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003;
| |
− | McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Chemistry, New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003; McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Computer and
| |
− | Electrical Engineering, New York: McGraw-Hill, 2004; McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Earth Science, 2nd ed., New
| |
− | York: McGraw-Hill, 2003; McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Engineering, 2nd ed., New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003;
| |
− | McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Geology and Mineralogy, New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003; McGraw-Hill Dictionary of
| |
− | Mathematics, New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003; McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Physics, 3rd ed., New York: McGraw-
| |
− | Hill, 2003; McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Environmental Science, New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003.
| |
− | | |
− | International Bureau of Weights and Measures, The International System of Units (SI), Barry N. Taylor, Ed.,
| |
− | Gaithersburg, MD: U.S. Department of Commerce, Technology Administration, National Institute of Standards
| |
− | and Technology, 2001.
| |
− | | |
− | Presents the basics of SI (International System of Units), metric conversion techniques, and proper
| |
− | abbreviations.
| |
− | | |
− | Stedman, Thomas Lathrop, Stedman's Medical Dictionary, 27th ed., Baltimore: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins,
| |
− | 2000 .
| |
− | | |
− | The standard authority on medical language cited in the major works on reference materials. Provides a
| |
− | comprehensive, current, and accurate medical lexicon to medical and allied health professionals. This latest
| |
− | edition includes Terminologia Anatomica, Genus Finder, and Anatomy Tables.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 45
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | A.5. Technical Writing Material
| |
− | | |
− | Anderson, Paul V., Technical Writing: A Reader-Centered Approach, 5th ed., Boston, Mass: Heinle, 2003.
| |
− | | |
− | This student text covers the writing process in seven sections: defining objectives, planning a report, drafting
| |
− | it, evaluating and revising it, superstructures (formats), and special activities such as oral presentations.
| |
− | | |
− | Includes a handbook.
| |
− | | |
− | Aired, Gerald J., Charles T. Brusaw, and Walter E. Oliu, Handbook of Technical Writing, 7th ed., Boston:
| |
− | Bedford/St. Martin’s Press, 2003.
| |
− | | |
− | This alphabetically arranged handbook covers usage, parts of speech, types of technical writing, format and
| |
− | graphics, writing and rhetorical principles, and mechanics.
| |
− | | |
− | Clements, Wallace, and Robert Berio, The Scientific Report: A Guide for Authors, Washington, D.C.: Society for
| |
− | Technical Communication, 1984.
| |
− | | |
− | Divided into two parts: advice for the writer and aids for the writer. Includes such topics as effective writing,
| |
− | the components of a report, graphics (including tables), footnotes and references, abbreviations, spelling,
| |
− | rules for writing numbers, and rules for presenting mathematical expressions.
| |
− | | |
− | Day, Robert A., How to Write and Publish a Scientific Paper, 5th ed., Phoenix: Oryx Press, 1998.
| |
− | | |
− | A book on writing and publishing primary research papers in scholarly journals. Anecdotal discussion provides
| |
− | a biological sciences editor’s view of articles written by professionals already in the field.
| |
− | | |
− | Day, Robert A., Scientific English: A Guide for Scientists and Other Professionals, 2nd ed., Phoenix: Oryx Press,
| |
− | 1995.
| |
− | | |
− | A book devoted to clarity and accuracy in technical writing.
| |
− | | |
− | Houp, Kenneth W., et al., Reporting Technical Information, 10th ed., New York: Oxford University Press, 2001.
| |
− | Six discrete sections: Part I covers the basics; Part II treats techniques; Part III covers document design; Part
| |
− | IV applies principles to numerous correspondence and report products; Part V covers oral reports; and Part VI
| |
− | is a handbook of errors and punctuation rules in technical writing.
| |
− | | |
− | Markel, Mike, Technical Communication, 7th ed., Boston: Beford/St. Martin’s, 2004.
| |
− | | |
− | Standard technical report writing textbook.
| |
− | | |
− | Michaelson, Herbert B., How to Write and Publish Engineering Papers and Reports, 3rd ed., Phoenix: Oryx
| |
− | Press, 1990.
| |
− | | |
− | Details the process of engineering writing and the preparation of formal papers and reports for publication.
| |
− | | |
− | Montgomery, Scott L., The Chicago Guide to Communicating Science, Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press,
| |
− | 2003.
| |
− | | |
− | This text guides writers who wish to communicate science through crafting many scientific communication
| |
− | forms. The Guide covers reading science as a precursor to writing well about science; explains how materials
| |
− | are reviewed; creating such forms as the scientific paper, review articles, book reviews, reports, proposals,
| |
− | and oral presentations.
| |
− | | |
− | Tichy, H. J., Effective Writing for Engineers, Managers, and Scientists, 2nd ed., New York: John Wiley and Sons,
| |
− | 1988.
| |
− | | |
− | Emphasizes the writing process in five sections: steps to better writing, standards of correctness, style, advice
| |
− | on common forms, and the role of an editor.
| |
− | | |
− | Robert, and Mary Fran Buehler, The Levels of Edit, 2nd ed., Arlington, Va.: Society for Technical
| |
− | Communication, 1992.
| |
− | | |
− | One of the best known books on editing and a must for the aspiring editor.
| |
− | | |
− | Weisman, Herman M., Basic Technical Writing, 6th ed., Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1997.
| |
− | | |
− | Covers basic expository techniques, correspondence, and report writing. Separate chapters cover organizing
| |
− | data, report format elements, mechanics and documentation, and graphics.
| |
− | | |
− | Weiss, Edmond H., The Writing System for Engineers and Scientists, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1982.
| |
− | Describes a system for writing about technical information. The system is composed of five parts: the system
| |
− | overview, planning, design guidelines, the draft, and editing and reproduction.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 46
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Wilkinson, Antoinette M., The Scientist’s Handbook for Writing Papers and Dissertations, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.:
| |
− | Prentice-Hall, 1991.
| |
− | | |
− | Begins by reviewing scientific research methods and then traces the way a scientific article evolves
| |
− | (introduction, methods, results, discussion). Also covers many types of visuals and how to publish an article.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | A.6. Standards and Symbols
| |
− | A.6.1. Standards
| |
− | | |
− | Association for Information and Image Management, American National Standard - Microfiche, ANSI/AIIM MS5-
| |
− | 1992 (R1998), New York: ANSI, 1991.
| |
− | | |
− | Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers and American Society for Testing and Materials, Use of the
| |
− | International System of Units (SI): The Modern Metric System, IEEE/ASTM SI-10-2002, New York: ANSI, 2002.
| |
− | | |
− | International Electrotechnical Commission, Preparation of Documents Used in Electrotechnology, 1st ed.,
| |
− | | |
− | IEC 61082, Geneva: IEC, 1991-1997.
| |
− | | |
− | Provides rules for location and installation documents mainly used for installation work. Covers different
| |
− | systems and objects such as arrangements or installation drawings for site, buildings and equipment,
| |
− | installation drawings or diagrams for site or buildings and drawings for location on or in components.
| |
− | | |
− | International Electrotechnical Commission, Designations for Signals: 7 Connections, 1st ed., IEC-61175,
| |
− | Geneva: IEC, 1993.
| |
− | | |
− | Gives rules for the composition of designations and names that identify signals and connections in
| |
− | electrotechnical and related fields.
| |
− | | |
− | International Organization for Standardization, International Terminology Standards - Preparation & Layout, 1st
| |
− | ed., ISO-10241, Geneva: ISO, 1992.
| |
− | | |
− | International Organization for Standardization, Technical Drawings - Item References, 1st ed., ISO-6433,
| |
− | Geneva: ISO, 1981.
| |
− | | |
− | International Organization for Standardization, Information & Documentation - Guidelines for the Content,
| |
− | Organization & Presentation of Indexes, 2nd ed., ISO-999, Geneva: ISO, 1996.
| |
− | | |
− | International Organization for Standardization, Documentation - Bibliographic References - Content, Form &
| |
− | Structure, 2nd ed., ISO-690, Geneva: ISO, 1987.
| |
− | | |
− | National Information Standards Organization, Standard Technical Report Number (STRN) Format and Creation,
| |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.23-1990, New York: ANSI, 1990.
| |
− | | |
− | National Information Standards Organization, Guidelines for Abstracts, ANSI/NISO Z39.14-1997 (R2002), New
| |
− | York: ANSI, 2002.
| |
− | | |
− | Procedures for the Transfer of Federal Scientific, Technical, and Engineering Information to NTIS under Public
| |
− | Law 102-245, Section 108, Federal Register 59 (1), January 3, 1994.
| |
− | | |
− | Outlines procedures for federal agencies to transfer to NTIS unclassified scientific, technical, and engineering
| |
− | information resulting from federally funded research and development activities.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | A.6.2. Graphic Symbols
| |
− | | |
− | American Society of Mechanical Engineers, American National Standard - Graphic Symbols for Fluid Power
| |
− | Diagrams, ANSI Y32.10-1967 (R1987), New York: ANSI, 1987.
| |
− | | |
− | American Society of Mechanical Engineers, American National Standard - Graphic Symbols for Plumbing
| |
− | Fixtures for Diagrams Used in Architecture and Building Construction, ANSI Y32.4-1977 (R2004), New York:
| |
− | ANSI, 2004.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 47
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | American Society of Mechanical Engineers, American National Standard - Graphic Symbols for Railroad Maps
| |
− | and Profiles, ANSI Y32.7-1972 (R2004), New York: ANSI, 2004.
| |
− | | |
− | American Society of Mechanical Engineers, American National Standard - Graphical Symbols for Process Flow
| |
− | Diagrams in the Petroleum and Chemical Industries, ANSI Y32.11-1961 (R1985), New York: ANSI, 1985.
| |
− | | |
− | American Society of Mechanical Engineers, American National Standard - Symbols for Mechanical and
| |
− | Acoustical Elements as Used in Schematic Diagrams, ANSI Y32.18-1972 (R2003), New York: ANSI, 2003.
| |
− | | |
− | American Welding Society, American National Standard - Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive
| |
− | Examination, ANSI/AWS A2.4-1998, New York: ANSI, 1998.
| |
− | | |
− | Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, American National Standard - Graphic Symbols for Electrical
| |
− | Wiring and Layout Diagrams Used in Architecture and Building Construction, ANSI Y32.9-1972 (R1989), New
| |
− | York: ANSI, 1989.
| |
− | | |
− | Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, American National Standard - Graphic Symbols for Electrical
| |
− | and Electronics Diagrams (Including Reference Designation Letters), ANSI/IEEE 315-1975 (R1993), New York:
| |
− | ANSI, 1993.
| |
− | | |
− | Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Supplement to ANSI Graphic Symbols for Electrical and
| |
− | Electronics Diagrams, ANSI/IEEE 315A-1986, New York: ANSI, 1986.
| |
− | | |
− | Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, American National Standard - Graphic Symbols for Grid and
| |
− | Mapping Diagrams Used in Cable Television Systems, ANSI/IEEE 623-1976 (R1988), New York: ANSI, 1988.
| |
− | | |
− | Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, American National Standard - Graphic Symbols for Logic
| |
− | Functions, ANSI/IEEE 91-1984 (R1994), New York: ANSI, 1994.
| |
− | | |
− | Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Supplement to IEEE Standard for Graphic Symbols for Logic
| |
− | Functions, ANSI/IEEE 91A-1991 (R1994), New York: ANSI, 1994.
| |
− | | |
− | Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, American National Standard - Reference Designations for
| |
− | Electrical and Electronics Parts and Equipment, ANSI/IEEE Y32.16-1975 (R1988), New York: ANSI, 1988.
| |
− | | |
− | Instrument Society of America, American National Standard - Instrumentation Symbols and Identification,
| |
− | ANSI/ISA S5.1-1984 (R1992), New York: ANSI, 1992.
| |
− | | |
− | International Electrotechnical Commission, Graphic Symbols for Diagrams [online database], 2nd ed.,
| |
− | | |
− | IEC-60617, Geneva: IEC, 2001-.
| |
− | | |
− | Contains graphical symbols to represent components, logic, and other aspects of electrical, electronic, and
| |
− | electromechanical devices. Part 1 from the first edition was withdrawn. Parts 2 to 13 have been incorporated
| |
− | into a database that currently includes some 1400 symbols. The database is the official source of IEC 60617
| |
− | and replaces the previous published version.
| |
− | | |
− | International Electrotechnical Commission, Graphic Symbols for Use on Equipment [online database], IEC-417,
| |
− | Geneva: IEC, 1997.
| |
− | | |
− | Establishes uniform graphical symbols, their graphic form, meaning, and application. These graphical symbols
| |
− | are placed on equipment or parts of equipment of any kind in order to instruct the persons handling the
| |
− | equipment as to its use and operation; they are also placed on sites and ways where people may assemble,
| |
− | or move, giving them instructions, such as prohibitions, warnings, rules or limits, for their behavior. They are
| |
− | used in pictorial reproductions, such as plans, drawings, maps, diagrams, and similar documents. For use in
| |
− | information processing and retrieval systems, a coded designation is applied to each of the symbols in this
| |
− | publication. Symbols from the previous print version of the standard have been incorporated into a database.
| |
− | | |
− | The database also includes symbols from ISO-7000 (see below).
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 48
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | International Organization for Standardization, Graphic Symbols for Use on Equipment - Index and synopsis, 3rd
| |
− | ed., ISO-7000:2004, Geneva: ISO, 2004.
| |
− | | |
− | National Fire Protection Association, Standard for Fire Safety Symbols, ANSI/NFPA 170-2002, New York: ANSI,
| |
− | 2002 .
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | A.6.3. Letter Symbols
| |
− | | |
− | Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, American National Standard - Letter Symbols and Abbreviations
| |
− | for Quantities Used In Acoustics, ANSI/IEEE 260.4-1996 (R2002), New York: ANSI, 2002.
| |
− | | |
− | Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Letter Symbols for Quantities Used in Electrical Science and
| |
− | Electrical Engineering, ANSI/IEEE 280-1985 (R2003), New York: ANSI, 2003.
| |
− | | |
− | Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Standard Letter Symbols for Units of Measurement (SI Units,
| |
− | Customary Inch-Pound Units, and Certain Other Units), ANSI/IEEE 260.1-2004, New York: ANSI, 2004.
| |
− | | |
− | Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Mathematical Signs and Symbols for Use in Physical Sciences
| |
− | and Technology, ANSI/IEEE 260.3-1993, New York: ANSI, 1993.
| |
− | | |
− | International Electrotechnical Commission, Letter Symbols to be Used in Electrical Technology, IEC-60027-1,
| |
− | Geneva: IEC.
| |
− | | |
− | Gives letter symbols for quantities and units used in electrical technology, and rules for their use and
| |
− | combination. Also specifies alphabets, subscripts, singularity functions, distributions and letter styles:
| |
− | | |
− | Part 1: General (6th ed., 1997)
| |
− | | |
− | Part 2: Telecommunications and Electronics (2nd ed., 2000)
| |
− | | |
− | Part 3: Logarithmic Quantities & Units (3rd ed., 2002)
| |
− | | |
− | Part 4: Symbols for Quantities to Be Used for Rotating Electrical Machines (1st ed., 1985)
| |
− | | |
− | International Organization for Standardization, Technical Product Information - Lettering - Part 0: General
| |
− | requirements, 1st ed., ISO-3098-0, Geneva: ISO, 1997.
| |
− | | |
− | International Organization for Standardization, Code for the Representation of Names of Languages, 1st ed.,
| |
− | ISO-639, Geneva: ISO, 1988-2002.
| |
− | | |
− | International Organization for Standardization, Codes for the Representation of the Names of Countries, ISO-
| |
− | 3166, Washington, D.C.: NISO; Geneva: ISO, 1997-1999.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | A.7. Library Reference Material
| |
− | | |
− | American Chemical Society Chemical Abstracts Service, Chemical Abstracts Service Source Index, 1907-1999
| |
− | Cumulative, Columbus, Ohio: Chemical Abstracts Service, 1999.
| |
− | | |
− | Lists the standard (preferred) abbreviations for titles of journals in the biological and physical sciences. Gives
| |
− | former title, if any; language of publication; publication history; publisher’s address, price, and the like.
| |
− | | |
− | Auger, Charles P., Information Sources in Grey Literature, 4th ed., New Providence, N.J.: Bowker-Saur, 1998.
| |
− | Describes how grey literature (publications that are not distributed through normal bookselling channels, such
| |
− | as theses, reports, translations, and conference proceedings) is produced, collected, and catalogued.
| |
− | | |
− | Explains how to identify, locate, and acquire such material in various subject disciplines that rely heavily on
| |
− | this type of literature, such as business and economics, education, and science and technology.
| |
− | | |
− | Bowker’s Books in Print, New York: R. R. Bowker, annual. Available online at http://www.booksinprint.com/bip/ .
| |
− | The standard listing of books issued by American publishers in author-title-series formats. Useful for checking
| |
− | bibliographies and notes. An editorial office should have access to the current edition, plus at least a selection
| |
− | of earlier volumes.
| |
− | | |
− | Cremmins, Edward T., The Art of Abstracting, 2nd ed., Arlington, Va.: Information Resources Press, 1996.
| |
− | Focuses on procedure for writing and editing abstracts. Also intended as a textbook on abstracting. Includes a
| |
− | glossary and annotated bibliographies on abstracting and thinking and cognition.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 49
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Guidelines for Descriptive Cataloguing of Reports: A Revision of the COSATI Standard for Descriptive
| |
− | Cataloging of Government Scientific and Technical Reports, Washington, D.C.: CENDI Cataloging Committee
| |
− | (Commerce, Energy, NASA, Defense Information), 1985. Available from NTIS, Springfield, VA22161 as PB 86-
| |
− | 112349.
| |
− | | |
− | This is an update of the COSATI guidelines for descriptive cataloging of scientific and technical reports. The
| |
− | COSATI guidelines have been followed by the major federal information processing agencies since the early
| |
− | 1960s.
| |
− | | |
− | Nimmer, Melville B., and David Nimmer, Nimmeron Copyright, New York: LEXIS Publications, 2000. Looseleaf,
| |
− | continually updated.
| |
− | | |
− | The most comprehensive, authoritative, and up-to-date publication on the subject of U.S. copyright law.
| |
− | | |
− | Patry, William F., Copyright Law and Practice, Washington, D.C.: BNA Books, 2004.
| |
− | | |
− | A standard work on copyright law. Intended as an update to Latman's The Copyright Law, it turned out to be
| |
− | five times the size of the original. Has a new organization but the same clarity of style and expression.
| |
− | | |
− | Patry, William F., The Fair Use Privilege in Copyright Law, 2nd ed., Washington, D.C.: BNA Books, 1995.
| |
− | | |
− | A focus on the use of copyrighted material that falls outside copyright royalty protection.
| |
− | | |
− | Strong, William S., The Copyright Book: A Practical Guide, 5th ed., Cambridge, Mass.: M.l.T. Press, 1999.
| |
− | | |
− | A succinct and well-written analysis of the law and a practical guide to its application.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | A.8. Graphic Arts
| |
− | | |
− | Baird, Russell N., et al., The Graphics of Communication: Methods, Media, and Technology, 6th ed., Fort Worth,
| |
− | Tex.: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1993.
| |
− | | |
− | A textbook in the graphic arts that covers all aspects of preparing documents for reading. Emphasis is on the
| |
− | visual elements, including design, typography, images, color, print media, newsletters, magazine and
| |
− | newspaper design, public relations, and television graphics. A concluding section discusses print production
| |
− | and electronic desktop publishing.
| |
− | | |
− | Beach, Mark, and Eric Kenly, Getting It Printed: How to Work with Printers and Graphic Imaging Services to
| |
− | Assure Quality, Stay on Schedule and Control Costs, 3rd ed., Cincinnati, Ohio: North Light Books, 1999.
| |
− | | |
− | An analysis of printing production steps from planning through delivery. Sections focus on topics such as
| |
− | typesetting, photographs, paper and ink, and printing methods. Chapters include checklists designed to cut
| |
− | production time and monitor quality control and production costs.
| |
− | | |
− | Greenwald, Martin L., and John C. Luttropp, Graphic Design and Production Technology, Upper Saddle River,
| |
− | N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 2001.
| |
− | | |
− | Covers the cross-disciplinary skills required by designers and publication-production personnel, providing
| |
− | information on production aspects important for digital and nonimpact printing. Discusses step-by-step graphic
| |
− | design, image generation, and what happens to an image when it leaves the computer screen.
| |
− | | |
− | Harris, Robert L. Information Graphics: A Comprehensive Reference: Visual Tools for Analyzing, Managing, and
| |
− | Communication, Atlanta, GA: Management Graphics, 1996
| |
− | | |
− | A comprehensive guide to developing and using graphics to present information effectively in visual formats.
| |
− | | |
− | The book helps authors prepare a variety of information visuals for operational purposes.
| |
− | | |
− | International Paper Company, Pocket Pal: A Graphic Arts Production Handbook, 19th ed., New York:
| |
− | International Paper Company, 2003.
| |
− | | |
− | Covers most aspects of publishing from printing to binding in language that is easy to understand. Color
| |
− | separation, halftones, imposition, and practically every other aspect of publishing are described. Revised
| |
− | periodically to reflect developments in the graphic arts.
| |
− | | |
− | Kepes, Gyorgy, Language of Vision, Dover, New York, 1995.
| |
− | | |
− | Analyzes the effect of visual language on the structure of human consciousness, in particular how the
| |
− | elements of line and form are perceived and how innovative types of perspective can lead to more dynamic
| |
− | representations in art.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 50
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Knuth, Donald E., The T ^Xbook, Reading, Mass.: Addison-Wesley, 1986.
| |
− | | |
− | A handbook about TeX, the typesetting system intended for publications that contain mathematics. Using
| |
− | TeX format, an author or editor can produce computerized mathematical copy comparable to printing.
| |
− | | |
− | Parker, Robert C., Looking Good in Print: A Guide to Basic Design for Desktop Publishing, 5th ed., Polygraph
| |
− | Press Books, 2003.
| |
− | | |
− | A textbook that carries the reader through the design and production processes. Chapters on type, graphic
| |
− | design, effective visuals, common pitfalls, and creating a variety of print products.
| |
− | | |
− | Pipes, Alan, Production for Graphic Designers, 3rd ed., Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 2001.
| |
− | | |
− | Up-to-date resource on production technology and methods for graphic design. Provides advice for preparing
| |
− | artwork for printers, creative typography in the digital environment, and working with text and graphics in
| |
− | computerized and conventional workflows. Special treatment of e-books, preflight checking, color
| |
− | management, and future print technologies.
| |
− | | |
− | Sawyer, Stanley A., and Steven G. Krantz, A TeX Primer for Scientists, Boca Raton, Fla.: CRC Press, 1995.
| |
− | An introduction to writing and preparing papers, reports, articles, and books with TeX. Designed for scientists,
| |
− | engineers, mathematicians, and technical staff. Discusses the necessary tasks required to prepare equations
| |
− | and text.
| |
− | | |
− | Tufte, Edward R., The Visual Display of Quantitative Information, rev. ed., Cheshire, Conn.: Graphics Press,
| |
− | 2001 .
| |
− | | |
− | Presents and illustrates the theory and practice of graphically representing quantitative data. Focuses on
| |
− | charts and graphs that display numerical information.
| |
− | | |
− | Tufte, Edward R., Envisioning Information, Cheshire, Conn.: Graphics Press, 1990.
| |
− | | |
− | Extensively illustrates the presentation of information in graphic form. Emphasizes maps and cartography.
| |
− | | |
− | Tufte, Edward R., Visual Explanations: Images and Quantities, Evidence and Narrative, Cheshire, Conn.:
| |
− | Graphics Press, 1997.
| |
− | | |
− | A third volume in his series of books on information display; this one centers on dynamic data (information
| |
− | that changes with time).
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | A.9. Typography and Publication Design
| |
− | | |
− | Bringhurst, Robert, The Elements of Typographic Style, 2nd ed., Point Roberts, Wash.: Hartley & Marks, 1996.
| |
− | Concerned with choosing the correct typeface; striving for rhythm, proportion, and harmony; combining type
| |
− | fonts and families; designing pages; using graphic elements like section heads, subheads, footnotes, and
| |
− | tables; adjusting type to improve legibility; and employing special characters, including punctuation and
| |
− | diacritical marks.
| |
− | | |
− | Carter, Rob, Ben Day, and Philip Meggs, Typographic Design: Form and Communication, 2nd ed., New York:
| |
− | Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1993.
| |
− | | |
− | Covers typographic heritage and fundamentals, problem-solving approaches, responsible design, legibility
| |
− | factors and type specimens. Provides a comprehensive overview of typographic-design fundamentals that
| |
− | includes the most important innovations of the past decade as well as desktop publishing, digital type, and bit¬
| |
− | mapped design.
| |
− | | |
− | Craig, James, and William Bevington, Designing with Type: A Basic Course in Typography, 4th ed., Watson-
| |
− | Guptill Publications, New York, 1999.
| |
− | | |
− | The basics of typography; good for the beginner.
| |
− | | |
− | Dowding, Geoffrey, Finer Points in the Spacing & Arrangement of Type, 3rd ed., London: Wace, 1966.
| |
− | | |
− | The ideas promoted by this slim volume are essential to well-set type. Emphasizes the importance of close
| |
− | word-spacing, ragged margins, and carefully hyphenated text. Provides invaluable advice on setting titles and
| |
− | drop caps.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 51
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Hart’s Rules for Compositors and Readers at the University Press , Oxford, 39th e<±, Oxford: Oxford University
| |
− | Press, 1983.
| |
− | | |
− | First published in 1893, Hart’s is a prime resource for those wanting to disseminate ideas. It provides
| |
− | guidance on matters such as alternate spellings, punctuation, capitalization, italicization, and abbreviations.
| |
− | Although intended for British authors, it offers guidance to anyone producing documents in paper or electronic
| |
− | forms.
| |
− | | |
− | Hendel, Richard, On Book Design, New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1998.
| |
− | | |
− | A detailed description of the creative process of book design; illustrated with many examples; seeks the most
| |
− | effective visual presentation of words. Not a strict set of rules for book design, but a philosophy of design for
| |
− | many types of books.
| |
− | | |
− | Hochuli, Jost, and Robin Kinross, Designing Books: Practice and Theory, London: Hyphen Press, 1996.
| |
− | | |
− | An anthology of book design. Defines the fundamental and constituent parts of books and the processes by
| |
− | which they are made. Covers specialist terminology; format; page proportions; choice of typeface; categories
| |
− | of books; and recurring design problems, such as title pages, tables of contents, and bibliographies. Each
| |
− | topic is considered in a page or two. Heavily illustrated with diagrams and examples.
| |
− | | |
− | Lawson, Alexanders., and Dwight Agner, Printing Types: An Introduction, rev. ed., Boston: Beacon Press, 1990.
| |
− | Covers the history and development, nomenclature, and classification of typefaces and provides a key to type
| |
− | identification.
| |
− | | |
− | McLean, Ruari, The Thames and Hudson Manual of Typography, London: Thames and Hudson, 1980.
| |
− | | |
− | Examines what makes a legible publication, taking into account typefaces, line length, use of space, and
| |
− | cultural background. Covers book design from the parts of a book to the merits of asymmetrical or centered
| |
− | typography to proofer's marks.
| |
− | | |
− | Tschichold, Jan, The New Typography: A Handbook for Modern Designers, Berkeley, Calif.: University of
| |
− | California Press, 1995.
| |
− | | |
− | Ranges from theoretical discussions of typography to practical considerations in the design of publications.
| |
− | | |
− | One of the best typographic how-to books ever published. It is the definitive treatise on book and graphic
| |
− | design in the machine age. An invaluable source of working principles for the practicing designer.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 52
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Appendix B
| |
− | | |
− | _ Glossary _
| |
− | | |
− | (This appendix is not part of ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005, Scientific and Technical Reports -Preparation, Presentation and
| |
− | | |
− | Preservation. It is included for information only.)
| |
− | | |
− | Term Definition
| |
− | | |
− | Administrative metadata Administrative metadata support maintaining and archiving reports and
| |
− | | |
− | ensure their long-term availability. Administrative metadata are needed
| |
− | for migration of data from one format to another and contain rights
| |
− | information used for access control. Such metadata include type and
| |
− | version of software used in preparing the report and rights-management
| |
− | requirements.
| |
− | | |
− | See also: Rights metadata
| |
− | | |
− | Americans with Disabilities Public Law 101- 336, 101st Congress, enacted July 26, 1990. The ADA
| |
− | | |
− | Act (ADA) prohibits discrimination and ensures equal opportunity for persons with
| |
− | | |
− | disabilities in employment, state and local government services, public
| |
− | accommodations, commercial facilities, and transportation.
| |
− | | |
− | See also: Section 508
| |
− | | |
− | Best practice Guide and documentation to describe and standardize the use of
| |
− | | |
− | processes that best support a community's needs.
| |
− | | |
− | Data element A discrete component of data or metadata.
| |
− | | |
− | Descriptive metadata Metadata that are used for the indexing, discovery, and identification of a
| |
− | | |
− | resource.
| |
− | | |
− | Digital document “Digital document definition: where the view of a document version
| |
− | | |
− | relevant for the requirements of one (of possibly multiple alternative)
| |
− | applications is represented using a digital representation format, such as
| |
− | a digital file.” (ISO 10303, Industrial Automation Systems and Integration)
| |
− | | |
− | Digital Object Identifier (DOI®) A DOI (Digital Object Identifier) is a persistent identifier given to a Web
| |
− | | |
− | J ' ’ file or other Internet document so that if its Internet address changes,
| |
− | | |
− | users will be redirected to its new address. The DOI is an implementation
| |
− | of the CNRI Handle System®, in which the term "DOI" is used instead of
| |
− | "Handle" to describe the identifiers. DOI syntax is defined in
| |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.84.
| |
− | | |
− | See also: Uniform Resource Name (URN)
| |
− | | |
− | Document-Type Definition In SGML or XML, a formal description of the components of a specific
| |
− | | |
− | (DTD) document or class of documents. DTDs provide a formal grammar used
| |
− | | |
− | for machine processing (parsing) of documents expressed in SGML or
| |
− | XML. A DTD description includes: the containers or elements that make
| |
− | up the document (for example, paragraphs, headings, list items, figures,
| |
− | tables, etc.); the logical structure of the document (for example, chapters
| |
− | containing sections, etc.); additional information associated with elements
| |
− | —known as attributes (for example, identifiers, date stamps, etc.).
| |
− | | |
− | Dublin Core The Dublin Core Metadata Element Set is a set of 15 descriptive
| |
− | | |
− | semantic definitions that represents a core set of elements likely to be
| |
− | useful across a broad range of disciplines. Dublin Core metadata
| |
− | supplement existing methods for searching and indexing Web-based
| |
− | metadata, regardless of whether the corresponding resource is an
| |
− | electronic document or a "real" physical object. Described in ANSI/NISO
| |
− | Z39.85.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 53
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Term
| |
− | | |
− | extensible Markup Language
| |
− | | |
− | extensible Stylesheet
| |
− | Language
| |
− | | |
− | Ingest
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | International Standard Book
| |
− | Number (ISBN)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | International Standard Serial
| |
− | Number (ISSN)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | MARC 21
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Metadata
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Multimedia
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Open Archival Information
| |
− | System (OAIS)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Definition
| |
− | | |
− | See: XML
| |
− | See: XSL
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | The external interface that accepts information into an archive. This
| |
− | process may include staging information to prepare for full acceptance,
| |
− | confirmation of receipt, and validation. OAIS contains the services and
| |
− | functions that accept Submission Information Packages from Producers,
| |
− | prepares Archival Information Packages for storage, and ensures that
| |
− | Archival Information Packages and their supporting Descriptive
| |
− | Information become established. Accession (traditional archives) = Ingest
| |
− | | |
− | The International Standard Book Number (ISBN) uniquely identifies books
| |
− | and book-like products published internationally. Every ISBN consists of a
| |
− | set number of digits (ten prior to a revision in 2004), and whenever it is
| |
− | printed it is preceded by the letters ISBN. The number is divided into four
| |
− | parts of variable length, each part separated by a hyphen. Described in
| |
− | ISO 2108.
| |
− | | |
− | The International Standard Serial Number (ISSN) uniquely identifies a
| |
− | serial title regardless of language or country in which it is published. An
| |
− | ISSN is eight digits long and always displayed this way: ISSN 1234-5679.
| |
− | The first seven digits serve as the title number and the eighth is a check
| |
− | digit, which provides an efficient means for discovering transcription
| |
− | errors. Described in ISO 3297 and ANSI/NISO Z39.9.
| |
− | | |
− | MARC is the acronym for MAchine-Readable Cataloging. It defines a data
| |
− | format that emerged from a Library of Congress led initiative begun thirty
| |
− | years ago. MARC became USMARC in the 1980s and MARC 21 in the
| |
− | late 1990s. It provides the mechanism by which computers exchange,
| |
− | use, and interpret bibliographic information and its data elements make
| |
− | up the foundation of most library catalogs used today.
| |
− | | |
− | Literally, "data about data," metadata include data associated with either
| |
− | an information system or an information object for purposes of
| |
− | description, administration, legal requirements, technical functionality, use
| |
− | and usage, and preservation.
| |
− | | |
− | See also: Administrative metadata, Descriptive metadata. Preservation
| |
− | metadata, Rights metadata, Structural metadata, Technical metadata,
| |
− | | |
− | Use metadata
| |
− | | |
− | Materials, documents, or products, such as World Wide Web pages, CD-
| |
− | ROMs, or components of digital libraries, archival information systems,
| |
− | and virtual museums that use any combination of text, numeric data, still
| |
− | and moving images, animation, sound, and graphics.
| |
− | | |
− | The Open Archival Information System (OAIS ) reference model is a
| |
− | conceptual framework for an archival system dedicated to preserving and
| |
− | maintaining access to digital information over the long term. The
| |
− | reference model increases awareness and understanding of concepts
| |
− | relevant for archiving digital objects, especially among nonarchival
| |
− | institutions; elucidate terminology and concepts for describing and
| |
− | comparing data models and archival architectures; expand consensus on
| |
− | the elements and processes endemic to digital information preservation
| |
− | and access; and create a framework to guide the identification and
| |
− | development of standards. Described in:
| |
− | http://public.ccsds.org/publications/archive/650x0b1 .pdf
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 54
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Term
| |
− | | |
− | Preservation metadata
| |
− | | |
− | Rights metadata
| |
− | | |
− | Section 508
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Structural metadata
| |
− | | |
− | Style Sheets
| |
− | | |
− | Technical metadata
| |
− | | |
− | Uniform Resource Name
| |
− | (URN)
| |
− | | |
− | Use metadata
| |
− | | |
− | USMARC
| |
− | | |
− | XML
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Definition
| |
− | | |
− | Metadata related to the preservation management of information
| |
− | resources, for example, metadata used to document, or created as a
| |
− | result of, preservation processes performed on information resources.
| |
− | | |
− | A form of administrative metadata dealing with rights management
| |
− | statements, including ownership statements, licenses, permissions, etc.
| |
− | | |
− | Section 508 refers to a statutory section in the Rehabilitation Act of 1973
| |
− | (found at 29 U.S.C. 794d). Congress significantly strengthened section
| |
− | 508 in the Workforce Investment Act of 1998. Its primary purpose is to
| |
− | provide access to and use of Federal executive agencies’ electronic and
| |
− | information technology (EIT) by individuals with disabilities. The statutory
| |
− | language of Section 508 can be found at http://www.section508.gov/ . The
| |
− | Access Board http://www.access-board.gov wrote the Section 508
| |
− | standards and is the U.S. federal agency responsible for developing and
| |
− | enforcing accessibility requirements.
| |
− | | |
− | See also: Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
| |
− | | |
− | Information used to display and navigate digital resources; also includes
| |
− | information on the internal organization of the digital resource. Structural
| |
− | metadata might include information such as the structural divisions of a
| |
− | resource (that is, chapters in a book) or sub-object relationships (such as
| |
− | individual diary entries in a diary section).
| |
− | | |
− | Style sheets describe how documents are presented on screens, in print,
| |
− | or perhaps how they are pronounced. By attaching style sheets to
| |
− | structured documents on the Web (for example XML), authors/creators
| |
− | and readers can influence the presentation of documents without
| |
− | sacrificing device-independence or adding new XML tags.
| |
− | | |
− | See also: XSL
| |
− | | |
− | Metadata created for, or generated by, a computer system, relating to
| |
− | how the system or its content behaves or needs to be processed.
| |
− | | |
− | Also referred to as "Universal Resource Name/Number." A unique,
| |
− | location-independent identifier of a file available on the Internet. The file
| |
− | remains accessible by its URN regardless of changes that might occur in
| |
− | its host and directory path. For information about Internet addressing,
| |
− | Described in: http://www.w3.org/Addressing/Addressing.html .
| |
− | | |
− | See also: Digital Object Identifier (DOI®)
| |
− | | |
− | Metadata, generally automatically created by the computer, that relate to
| |
− | the level and type of use of an information system.
| |
− | | |
− | See: MARC 21
| |
− | | |
− | XML is extensible Markup Language, a project of the
| |
− | World Wide Web Consortium (W3C): the development of the specification
| |
− | is being supervised by their XML Working Group. It is designed to
| |
− | improve the functionality of the Web by providing more flexible and
| |
− | adaptable information identification. It is called extensible because it is
| |
− | not a fixed format like HTML (a single, predefined markup language).
| |
− | Instead, XML is actually a metalanguage—a language for describing
| |
− | other languages—which allows customized markup languages for
| |
− | limitless different types of objects. XML can do this because it's written in
| |
− | SGML (ISO 8879), the international standard metalanguage for text
| |
− | markup systems.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 55
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Term Definition
| |
− | | |
− | XSL XSL (extensible Stylesheet Language) is a language for expressing
| |
− | | |
− | stylesheets for XML objects. It consists of two parts: a language for
| |
− | transforming XML objects, and an XML vocabulary for specifying
| |
− | formatting semantics. The originality and power of XSL is more general
| |
− | than just describing how XML items should be presented; it allows, as
| |
− | well as describes, how these objects can be transformed into other
| |
− | objects. The part of XSL dealing with document transformation is called
| |
− | XSLT. The part of XSL dealing with formatting objects is called XSL-FO.
| |
− | XSL and XSLT are currently working drafts of the
| |
− | World Wide Web Consortium (W3C).
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 56
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Appendix C
| |
− | | |
− | Dublin Core Data Elements
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | (This appendix is not part of ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005, Scientific and Technical Reports - Preparation, Presentation and
| |
− | Preservation. It is included for information only.)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Element Name: Title
| |
− | | |
− | Label: Title
| |
− | | |
− | Definition: A name given to the resource.
| |
− | | |
− | Comment: Typically, Title will be a name by which the resource is formally known.
| |
− | | |
− | Element Name: Creator
| |
− | | |
− | Label: Creator
| |
− | | |
− | Definition: An entity primarily responsible for making the content of the resource.
| |
− | | |
− | Comment: Examples of Creator include a person, an organization, or a service. Typically, the
| |
− | | |
− | name of a Creator should be used to indicate the entity.
| |
− | | |
− | Element Name: Subject
| |
− | | |
− | Label: Subject and Keywords
| |
− | | |
− | Definition: A topic of the content of the resource.
| |
− | | |
− | Comment: Typically, Subject will be expressed as keywords, key phrases, or classification
| |
− | | |
− | codes that describe a topic of the resource. Recommended best practice is to
| |
− | select a value from a controlled vocabulary or formal classification scheme.
| |
− | | |
− | Element Name: Description
| |
− | | |
− | Label: Description
| |
− | | |
− | Definition: An account of the content of the resource.
| |
− | | |
− | Comment: Examples of Description include, but are not limited to: an abstract, table of
| |
− | | |
− | contents, reference to a graphical representation of content or a free-text account
| |
− | of the content.
| |
− | | |
− | Element Name: Publisher
| |
− | | |
− | Label: Publisher
| |
− | | |
− | Definition: An entity responsible for making the resource available
| |
− | | |
− | Comment: Examples of Publisher include a person, an organization, or a service. Typically,
| |
− | | |
− | the name of a Publisher should be used to indicate the entity.
| |
− | | |
− | Element Name: Contributor
| |
− | | |
− | Label: Contributor
| |
− | | |
− | Definition: An entity responsible for making contributions to the content of the resource.
| |
− | | |
− | Comment: Examples of Contributor include a person, an organization, or a service. Typically,
| |
− | | |
− | the name of a Contributor should be used to indicate the entity.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Element Name: Date
| |
− | | |
− | Label:
| |
− | | |
− | Definition:
| |
− | | |
− | Comment:
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Date
| |
− | | |
− | A date of an event in the lifecycle of the resource.
| |
− | | |
− | Typically, Date will be associated with the creation or availability of the resource.
| |
− | Recommended best practice for encoding the date value is defined in a profile of
| |
− | ISO 8601 [W3C Date and Time Formats] and includes (among others) dates of the
| |
− | form YYYY-MM-DD.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 57
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Element Name:
| |
− | | |
− | Label:
| |
− | | |
− | Definition:
| |
− | | |
− | Comment:
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Element Name:
| |
− | | |
− | Label:
| |
− | | |
− | Definition:
| |
− | | |
− | Comment:
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Element Name:
| |
− | | |
− | Label:
| |
− | | |
− | Definition:
| |
− | | |
− | Comment:
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Element Name:
| |
− | | |
− | Label:
| |
− | | |
− | Definition:
| |
− | | |
− | Comment:
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Element Name:
| |
− | | |
− | Label:
| |
− | | |
− | Definition:
| |
− | | |
− | Comment:
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Element Name:
| |
− | | |
− | Label:
| |
− | | |
− | Definition:
| |
− | | |
− | Comment:
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Type
| |
− | | |
− | Resource Type
| |
− | | |
− | The nature or genre of the content of the resource.
| |
− | | |
− | Type includes terms describing general categories, functions, genres, or
| |
− | aggregation levels for content. Recommended best practice is to select a value
| |
− | from a controlled vocabulary (for example, the DCMI Type Vocabulary) . To
| |
− | describe the physical or digital manifestation of the resource, use the FORMAT
| |
− | element.
| |
− | | |
− | Format
| |
− | | |
− | Format
| |
− | | |
− | The physical or digital manifestation of the resource.
| |
− | | |
− | Typically, Format may include the media-type or dimensions of the resource.
| |
− | Format may be used to identify the software, hardware, or other equipment
| |
− | needed to display or operate the resource. Examples of dimensions include size
| |
− | and duration. Recommended best practice is to select a value from a controlled
| |
− | vocabulary (for example, the list of Internet Media Types [MIME] defining computer
| |
− | media formats).
| |
− | | |
− | Identifier
| |
− | | |
− | Resource Identifier
| |
− | | |
− | An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context.
| |
− | | |
− | Recommended best practice is to identify the resource by means of a string or
| |
− | number conforming to a formal identification system. Formal identification systems
| |
− | include, but are not limited to, the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) (including the
| |
− | Uniform Resource Locator (URL)), the Digital Object Identifier (DOI), and the
| |
− | International Standard Book Number (ISBN).
| |
− | | |
− | Source
| |
− | | |
− | Source
| |
− | | |
− | A Reference to a resource from which the present resource is derived.
| |
− | | |
− | The present resource may be derived from the Source resource in whole or in
| |
− | part. Recommended best practice is to identify the referenced resource by means
| |
− | of a string or number conforming to a formal identification system.
| |
− | | |
− | Language
| |
− | | |
− | Language
| |
− | | |
− | A language of the intellectual content of the resource.
| |
− | | |
− | Recommended best practice is to use Tags for the Idenfitication of Languages,
| |
− | RFC 3066 , which, in conjunction with ISQ639 , Codes for the representation of
| |
− | names of languages, defines two- and three-letter primary language tags with
| |
− | optional subtags. Examples include "en" or "eng" for English, "akk" for Akkadian,
| |
− | and "en-GB" for English used in the United Kingdom.
| |
− | | |
− | Relation
| |
− | | |
− | Relation
| |
− | | |
− | A reference to a related resource.
| |
− | | |
− | Recommended best practice is to identify the referenced resource by means of a
| |
− | string or number conforming to a formal identification system.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 58
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Element Name:
| |
− | | |
− | Label:
| |
− | | |
− | Definition:
| |
− | | |
− | Comment:
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Element Name:
| |
− | | |
− | Label:
| |
− | | |
− | Definition:
| |
− | | |
− | Comment:
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Coverage
| |
− | | |
− | Coverage
| |
− | | |
− | The extent or scope of the content of the resource.
| |
− | | |
− | Typically, Coverage will include spatial location (a place name or geographic
| |
− | coordinates), temporal period (a period label, date, or date range), or jurisdiction
| |
− | (such as a named administrative entity). Recommended best practice is to select a
| |
− | value from a controlled vocabulary (for example, the Getty Thesaurus of
| |
− | Geographic Names ) and to use, where appropriate, named places or time periods
| |
− | in preference to numeric identifiers such as sets of coordinates or date ranges.
| |
− | | |
− | Rights
| |
− | | |
− | Rights Management
| |
− | | |
− | Information about rights held in and over the resource.
| |
− | | |
− | Typically, Rights will contain a rights management statement for the resource, or
| |
− | reference a service providing such information. Rights information often
| |
− | encompasses Intellectual Property Rights (IPR), Copyright, and various Property
| |
− | Rights. If the Rights element is absent, no assumptions may be made about any
| |
− | rights held in or over the resource.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 59
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Appendix D
| |
− | | |
− | Formats for Organizing a Scientific or Technical Report
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | (This appendix is not part of ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005, Scientific and Technical Reports -Preparation, Presentation
| |
− | and Preservation. It is included for information only.)
| |
− | | |
− | The way a scientific or technical report is organized has evolved over the past 30 years from a
| |
− | content-based organization pattern to a user-based organization pattern. What follows are three
| |
− | outlines typical for reports that solve problems, make recommendations, etc., presented in historical
| |
− | order. These patterns are included for illustration; they do not necessarily conform to all of the
| |
− | requirements and recommendations in this Standard.
| |
− | | |
− | Traditional Pattern
| |
− | | |
− | Front matter
| |
− | | |
− | Title page
| |
− | | |
− | Table of Contents (includes list of appendix materials)
| |
− | | |
− | List of Illustrations/Figures
| |
− | Abstract
| |
− | Body of report
| |
− | | |
− | Problem/background
| |
− | Methodology to solve
| |
− | Results
| |
− | Discussion
| |
− | | |
− | Conclusion/Summary/Recommendations
| |
− | Back matter
| |
− | | |
− | References
| |
− | | |
− | Index
| |
− | | |
− | Appendix materials
| |
− | | |
− | Modified Traditional (intermediate pattern)
| |
− | | |
− | Front matter
| |
− | | |
− | Title page
| |
− | | |
− | Table of Contents (includes list of appendix materials)
| |
− | | |
− | List of Illustrations/Figures
| |
− | | |
− | Executive Summary (approximately 10% of body of report)
| |
− | | |
− | Body of report
| |
− | | |
− | Problem/background
| |
− | Methodology to solve
| |
− | Results
| |
− | Discussion
| |
− | | |
− | Conclusion/Summary/Recommendations
| |
− | Back matter
| |
− | | |
− | References
| |
− | | |
− | Index
| |
− | | |
− | Appendix material
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 60
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Modern
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Front matter
| |
− | Title page
| |
− | | |
− | Table of Contents (includes list of appendix materials)
| |
− | List of Illustrations/Figures
| |
− | Executive Summary (ranges from 3-15 pages)
| |
− | Background/Problem
| |
− | Methods
| |
− | | |
− | Rarely appear
| |
− | | |
− | Reader assumes writer is competent professional
| |
− | Executives typically do not care about details
| |
− | At most, 1-2 sentences
| |
− | Used to make your results credible
| |
− | Solutions, recommendations, conclusions
| |
− | Implications
| |
− | Political
| |
− | Fiscal
| |
− | | |
− | Appendix materials—for example
| |
− | | |
− | Background/Statement of problem/Assignment
| |
− | | |
− | Methods used to solve problem
| |
− | | |
− | Results
| |
− | | |
− | Discussions
| |
− | | |
− | Conclusion
| |
− | | |
− | Indices (usually more than one)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 61
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Appendix E
| |
− | | |
− | Report Documentation Page, Standard Form (SF) 298
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | (This appendix is not part of ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005, Scientific and Technical Reports - Preparation, Presentation
| |
− | and Preservation. It is included for information only.)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | REPORT DOCUMENTATION PAGE
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Form Approved
| |
− | OMB No. 0704-0168
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | The public reporting burden for tvs coToctoon of information i* estimafod to average 1 hour per **»**«. induing the fcne tor revfewng instructions, searching etfstrg lata sources searching ewstma ttoto
| |
− | sottoes. gathering end maintaming the ceta nwded. and complelng and reUeaeng the co4wd.cn of Inforrnelon Send commits regarding this burden esfcnete or any other aspect of tas cotfectton of
| |
− | inforrralion. incfvftng suggestions for redudng this tx.rder, to Department trf Defense. Washington Headquarters Services. OireCtorafe for tofcnnabon Operations and Reports (0704-0188) 1215 Jefferson
| |
− | Devis Highway. Suite 1204. Arlington. VA 22202-4302 Respondents she'id be eware tiat notwithstanding any other provision of law. no person sha.1 be subject to ary penalty for faring to comet v with a
| |
− | collecton of information if H does not display a currently veid OMB control number. PLEASE DO NOT RETURN YOUR FORM TO THE ABOVE ADDRESS 1
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 1. REPORT DATE (DD-MM-YY)
| |
− | | |
− | 2. REPORT TYPE
| |
− | | |
− | [ 3. DATES COVERED (From - To)
| |
− | | |
− | July 2003
| |
− | | |
− | Conference Paper Preprint
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 4. TITLE AND SUBTITLE
| |
− | | |
− | [5a. CONTRACT NUMBER
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | UAV TASK ASSIGNMENT WITH TIMING CONSTRAINTS
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 6. AUTHOR(S|
| |
− | | |
− | Corey Schumacher and Phillip Chandler (AFRL/VACA)
| |
− | | |
− | Meir Pachter (AFIT/ENG)
| |
− | | |
− | 5d. PROJECT NUMBER
| |
− | | |
− | N/A
| |
− | | |
− | 5«. TASK NUMBER
| |
− | | |
− | N/A
| |
− | | |
− | 5f. WORK UNIT NUMBER
| |
− | | |
− | N/A
| |
− | | |
− | 7. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION NAME(S) AND ADORESS(ES)
| |
− | | |
− | Control Theory Optimization Branch (AFRL/VACA)
| |
− | | |
− | Control Sciences Division
| |
− | | |
− | Air Vehicles Directorate
| |
− | | |
− | Air Force Research Laboratory, Air Force Materiel Command
| |
− | Wright-Patterson Air Force Base, OH 45433-7542
| |
− | | |
− | AFIT/ENG
| |
− | | |
− | 8. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION
| |
− | | |
− | REPORT NUMBER
| |
− | | |
− | AFRL-VA-WP-TP-2003-315
| |
− | | |
− | 9. SPONSORING/MONITORING AGENCY NAME(S) AND ADDRESS(ES)
| |
− | | |
− | Air Vehicles Directorate
| |
− | | |
− | Air Force Research Laboratory
| |
− | | |
− | Air Force Materiel Command
| |
− | | |
− | Wright-Patterson Air Force Base, OH 45433-7542
| |
− | | |
− | 10. SPONSORING/MONITORING AGENCY
| |
− | ACRONYM(S)
| |
− | | |
− | AFRL/VACA
| |
− | | |
− | 11. SPONSORING/MONITORING AGENCY
| |
− | REPORT NUMBER(S)
| |
− | | |
− | AFRL-VA-WP-TP-2003-315
| |
− | | |
− | 12. DISTRIBUTION/AVAILABILITY STATEMENT
| |
− | | |
− | Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
| |
− | | |
− | 13. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES
| |
− | | |
− | To be presented at the AIAA Guidance Navigation and Control Conference, Austin, TX, August 11-14, 2003.
| |
− | | |
− | This material is declared a work of the U.S. Government and is not subject to copyright protection in the United States.
| |
− | | |
− | 14. ABSTRACT
| |
− | | |
− | This paper addresses the problem of task allocation for wide area search munitions. The munitions are required to search
| |
− | for, classify, attack, and verify the destruction of potential targets. We assume that target field information is
| |
− | communicated between all elements of the swarm. We generate a tour of optimal assignments for each vehicle using a
| |
− | Mixed Integer Linear Program, or MILP format. MILP can assign tasks that look infeasible, due to timing, by adding
| |
− | time to a UAV’s path, and vehicle paths are then recalculated to match the required arrival times. The MILP formulation
| |
− | with variable arrival times provides an optimal solution to multiple-assignment problems for groups of UAVs with
| |
− | coupled tasks involving timing and task order constraints.
| |
− | | |
− | 15. SUBJECT TERMS
| |
− | | |
− | task allocation, cooperative control, wide area search munitions
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | In-house
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 5b. GRANT NUMBER
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 5c. PROGRAM ELEMENT NUMBER
| |
− | | |
− | N/A
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | 16. SECURITY CLASSIFICATION OF:
| |
− | | |
− | a. REPORT
| |
− | | |
− | Unclassified
| |
− | | |
− | b. ABSTRACT
| |
− | | |
− | Unclassified
| |
− | | |
− | c. THIS PAGE
| |
− | | |
− | Unclassified
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 17. LIMITATION
| |
− | OF ABSTRACT:
| |
− | SAR
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 18. NUMBER
| |
− | OF PAGES
| |
− | 14
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 19a. NAME OF RESPONSIBLE PERSON (Monitor)
| |
− | Phillip Chandler
| |
− | | |
− | 19b. TELEPHONE NUMBER (Include Area Code)
| |
− | (937) 255-8680
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Standard Form 238 (Rev. 8*98)
| |
− | | |
− | Prescribed by ANSI SW Z39-18
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 62
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETING SF 298
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 8. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION REPORT NUMBER.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | 1. REPORT DATE. Full publication date, including
| |
− | day, month, if available. Must cite at least the year
| |
− | and be Year 2000 compliant, e.g. 30-06-1998;
| |
− | xx-06-1998; xx-xx-1998.
| |
− | | |
− | 2. REPORT TYPE. State the type of report, such as
| |
− | final, technical, interim, memorandum, master's
| |
− | thesis, progress, quarterly, research, special, group
| |
− | study, etc.
| |
− | | |
− | 3. DATES COVERED. Indicate the time during
| |
− | which the work was performed and the report was
| |
− | written, e.g., Jun 1997 - Jun 1998; 1-10 Jun 1 996;
| |
− | May - Nov 1 998; Nov 1998.
| |
− | | |
− | 4. TITLE. Enter title and subtitle with volume
| |
− | number and part number, if applicable. On classified
| |
− | documents, enter the title classification in
| |
− | parentheses.
| |
− | | |
− | 5a. CONTRACT NUMBER. Enter all contract
| |
− | numbers as they appear in the report, e.g.
| |
− | | |
− | F3361 5-86-C-5169.
| |
− | | |
− | 5b. GRANT NUMBER. Enter all grant numbers as
| |
− | they appear in the report, e.g. AFOSR-82-1234.
| |
− | | |
− | 5c. PROGRAM ELEMENT NUMBER. Enter all
| |
− | program element numbers as they appear in the
| |
− | report, e.g. 61101 A.
| |
− | | |
− | 5d. PROJECT NUMBER. Enter all project numbers
| |
− | as they appear in the report, e.g. 1F665702D1257;
| |
− | ILIR.
| |
− | | |
− | 5e. TASK NUMBER. Enter all task numbers as they
| |
− | appear in the report, e.g. 05; RF0330201; T4112.
| |
− | | |
− | 5f. WORK UNIT NUMBER. Enter all work unit
| |
− | numbers as they appear in the report, e.g. 001;
| |
− | AFAPL30480105.
| |
− | | |
− | 6. AUTHOR(S). Enter name(s) of person(s)
| |
− | responsible for writing the report, performing the
| |
− | research, or credited with the content of the report.
| |
− | The form of entry is the last name, first name, middle
| |
− | initial, and additional qualifiers separated by commas,
| |
− | e.g. Smith, Richard, J, Jr.
| |
− | | |
− | 7. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION NAME(S) AND
| |
− | | |
− | ADDRESS(ES). Self-explanatory.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Enter all unique alphanumeric report numbers assigned
| |
− | by the performing organization, e.g. BRL-1234;
| |
− | AFWL-TR-8 5-4017-Vol-21 -PT-2.
| |
− | | |
− | 9. SPONSORING/MONITORING AGENCY NAME(S)
| |
− | | |
− | AND ADDRESS(ES). Enter the name and address of the
| |
− | organizationfs) financially responsible for and monitoring
| |
− | the work.
| |
− | | |
− | 10. SPONSOR/MONITOR'S ACRONYM(S). Enter, if
| |
− | available, e.g. BRL, ARDEC, NADC.
| |
− | | |
− | 11. SPONSOR/MONITOR'S REPORT NUMBER(S).
| |
− | | |
− | Enter report number as assigned by the sponsoring/
| |
− | monitoring agency, if available, e.g. BRL-TR-829; -215.
| |
− | | |
− | 12. DISTRIBUTION/AVAILABILITY STATEMENT. Use
| |
− | | |
− | agency-mandated availability statements to indicate the
| |
− | public availability or distribution limitations of the
| |
− | report. If additional limitations/ restrictions or special
| |
− | markings are indicated, follow agency authorization
| |
− | procedures, e.g. RD/FRD, PROPIN, ITAR, etc. Include
| |
− | copyright information.
| |
− | | |
− | 13. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES. Enter information not
| |
− | included elsewhere such as; prepared in cooperation
| |
− | with; translation of; report supersedes; old edition
| |
− | number, etc.
| |
− | | |
− | 14. ABSTRACT. A brief (approximately 200 words)
| |
− | factual summary of the most significant information.
| |
− | | |
− | 15. SUBJECT TERMS. Key words or phrases
| |
− | identifying major concepts in the report.
| |
− | | |
− | 16. SECURITY CLASSIFICATION. Enter security
| |
− | classification in accordance with security classification
| |
− | regulations, e.g. U, C, S, etc. If this form contains
| |
− | classified information, stamp classification level on the
| |
− | lop and bottom of this page.
| |
− | | |
− | 17. LIMITATION OF ABSTRACT. This block must be
| |
− | completed to assign a distribution limitation to the
| |
− | abstract. Enter UU (Unclassified Unlimited) or SAR
| |
− | (Same as Report). An entry in this block is necessary if
| |
− | the abstract is to be limited.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Standard Form 298 Back (Rev. 8/98)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 63
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Appendix F
| |
− | | |
− | XML DTD and Sample XSL (Style Sheet)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | (This appendix is not part of ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005, Scientific and Technical Reports -Preparation, Presentation
| |
− | and Preservation. It is included for information only.)
| |
− | | |
− | This is a proposed DTD and sample XSL developed for NISO Z39.18, Scientific and Technical
| |
− | Reports -Preparation, Presentation and Preservation, by Jianfeng Tang ( tang i@cs.odu.edu ) at Old
| |
− | Dominion University, supervised by Prof. Kurt Maly (maly@cs.odu.edu ) and Prof. Mohammad Zubair
| |
− | ( zubair@cs.odu.edu)
| |
− | | |
− | The DTD does not proscribe the details of complex objects such as tables, equations, or figures and
| |
− | does not include the rules for footnotes or callouts. It does handle the need for, and matching of,
| |
− | instances of the objects being created and referenced.
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- ANSI/NISO Z39.18 scientific and technical reports DTD -->
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | <!— Typical usage:
| |
− | | |
− | <!DOCTYPE Z39-18 SYSTEM "z39.18.dtd">
| |
− | | |
− | <Z39-18>
| |
− | | |
− | </Z39-18>
| |
− | | |
− | — >
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- This is the top level element -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT Z39-18 (front_matter,body,back_matter) >
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- Front Matter -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT front_matter
| |
− | | |
− | (metadata,cover?,noticesection?,format?,reportdocument?,copyrightpage?,foreword?,prefac
| |
− | e?,ackno*)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- title section can be generated from metadata -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- contend section, list of tables, list of figures can be generated by XSL -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- general metadata -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT metadata (report_no, title,subtitle?, seriesinfo?, creator*, abstract,
| |
− | perform_org*, sponsor_org*, publishinfo?, type?, coverage*, contract_no*, subject*,
| |
− | copyright?, distribution?, language?, code?, cover?, copyrightpage?, reportdocument?)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- specific metadata for cover page in addtion to
| |
− | | |
− | report_no, title, subtitle, seriesinfo, creator, publishinfo/publisher,
| |
− | publishinfo/date
| |
− | | |
− | — >
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT cover (price?, tech_requirement?, limitation?, notice?)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT price (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- Technical requirements in cover page (e.g.for example, video, audio, digital)
| |
− | | |
− | — >
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT tech_requirement (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- distribution limitation -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT limitation (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT notice (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- format section -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT format (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 64
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | <!-- specific metadata for copyrightpage in addition to sponsor_org, code
| |
− | | |
− | -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT copyrightpage (cipdata?, country?, usepermission?, mission?, rightholder?,
| |
− | authority?, producer?)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication (CIP) Data -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT cipdata (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- The country in which the report was produced -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT country (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- Permission for use of proprietary information -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT usepermission (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- The mission statement of the producer, trademark information, and any disclaimers
| |
− | from the producer -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT mission (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | . <!-- A copyright symbol, year, and the name of the copyright holder -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT rightholder (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- Authority to copy the contents -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT authority (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | .<!ELEMENT producer (name,address?,telephone?,webaddress*,emailaddress*)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT name (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT address (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT webaddress (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT emailaddress (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- metadata for report document page in addition to date, type, coverage, title,
| |
− | subtitle, contract_no, creator, perform_org, report no, sponsor_org, distribution,
| |
− | abstract, subject —>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- Detailed information about Standard Form 298
| |
− | is available at http://www.navysbir.com/SF298.doc -->
| |
− | | |
− | <(ELEMENT reportdocument (formno, grant_no?, program_no?, project_no?, task_no?,
| |
− | work_unit_no?, sponsor_acronym*, sponsor_report_no?, notes?, classification?,
| |
− | abstract_limitation?, pages?, person_name?, telephone? )>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- form number -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT form_no (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- grant number -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT grant_no (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- program element number -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT program_no (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- project number -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT project_no (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- task number -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT task_no (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- work unit number -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT work_unit_no (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- Sponsor's acronym -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT sponsoracronym (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- sponsoring agancy report number -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT sponsor_report_no (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- supplementary notes -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT notes (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- security classification for report, abstract, and this page-->
| |
− | | |
− | <(ELEMENT classification (reportclass, abstractclass, thispageclass)>
| |
− | | |
− | <(ELEMENT reportclass (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <(ELEMENT abstractclass (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT thispageclass (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- limitation of abstract -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT abstract_limitation (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- number of pages -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT pages (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- name of responsible person -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT person^name (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- telephone number -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT telephone (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 65
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | <!-- notices section -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT noticesection (header,paragraph*)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT foreword (header,paragraph*)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ATTLIST foreword label ID #IMPLIED>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT preface (paragraph*)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ATTLIST preface label ID #IMPLIED>
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | <!-- acknowledge -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT ackno (paragraph*)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ATTLIST ackno label ID #IMPLIED>
| |
− | | |
− | <!--report number -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT report_no (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!--report title -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT title (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!--report subtitle -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT subtitle (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!--Information about report series -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT seriesinfo (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- . Definition: author, principal investigator, editor, compiler.
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT creator (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!--publish data in title section -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT publishinfo (place*,publisher*,date?)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- Definition: publish date -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT date (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- Subject and Keywords -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT subject ((keyword*|category*))*>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT keyword (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT category (#PCDATA | category)*>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- abstract in front_matter -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT abstract (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- An entity responsible for making the resource available -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT publisher (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- Definition: A language of the resource. -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT language (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- .. Definition: The extent or scope of the content of the resource. -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT coverage (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT copyright (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!--distribution limit -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT distribution (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!--bar code, isbn or issn -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT code (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <(ATTLIST code type (barcode|isbn|issn) #REQUIRED>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- end of front matter group -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- body —>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT body (summary, introduction, (methods | assumptions | procedures )+,
| |
− | results, conclusions, recommendations?, references) >
| |
− | | |
− | <(ELEMENT summary (section)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT introduction (section)>
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 66
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ELEMENT
| |
− | | |
− | ELEMENT
| |
− | | |
− | ELEMENT
| |
− | | |
− | ELEMENT
| |
− | | |
− | ELEMENT
| |
− | | |
− | ELEMENT
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | methods (section)>
| |
− | assumptions (section)>
| |
− | procedures (section)>
| |
− | results (section)>
| |
− | conclusions (section)>
| |
− | recommendations (section)>
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT references (header,reference*)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- label: an unique identifier references section -->
| |
− | <!ATTLIST references label ID #IMPLIED>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT reference (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ATTLIST reference label ID #IMPLIED>
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT section (header,(paragraph | figure | table | equation | informalequation |
| |
− | inlineequation | section)*)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- label: an unique identifier for this section -->
| |
− | | |
− | <(ATTLIST section label ID #IMPLIED>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT header (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT paragraph ((text | inlineequation | crossref | list | pagenumber | citation
| |
− | | indexterm | inlinegraphic )*)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- group of list -->
| |
− | | |
− | <(ELEMENT list (listitem+)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- each list in the list group -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT listitem ((text | inlineequation | crossref | pagenumber | citation |
| |
− | indexterm | inlinegraphic )*)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- used for table, figure, etc. —>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT crossref (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- The identifier for the table, figure, or other element which it cited to -->
| |
− | | |
− | <(ATTLIST crossref reflabel IDREF #REQUIRED>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- a citation in the body of the document -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT citation (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- reflabel: the identifier for the cited reference -->
| |
− | | |
− | <(ATTLIST citation reflabel IDREF #REQUIRED>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- index term in the body of the document -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT indexterm (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <(ATTLIST indexterm label ID #REQUIRED>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- just for display purpose —>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT pagenumber (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- general text -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT text (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT table (caption?,graphic!)>
| |
− | | |
− | <(ATTLIST table float CDATA #IMPLIED
| |
− | label ID #IMPLIED
| |
− | pgwide CDATA #IMPLIED>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT figure (caption?,graphic!)>
| |
− | | |
− | <(ATTLIST figure float CDATA #IMPLIED
| |
− | label ID #IMPLIED
| |
− | pgwide CDATA #IMPLIED>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- The meaning of the attributes for graphic and inlinegraphic is compliant with
| |
− | DocBook standard,
| |
− | | |
− | ...http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/documentation/reference/html/doebook.html
| |
− | | |
− | -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT graphic (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <(ATTLIST graphic sreedit CDATA #IMPLIED
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 67
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | format (GIF| JPEG) #IMPLIED
| |
− | | |
− | fileref CDATA #IMPLIED
| |
− | | |
− | align (left|center|right) #IMPLIED
| |
− | | |
− | width CDATA "80%"
| |
− | | |
− | depth CDATA #IMPLIED
| |
− | | |
− | scale CDATA #IMPLIED
| |
− | | |
− | scalefit CDATA #IMPLIED>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- graphic should keep in the same line of its surrounding texts -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT inlinegraphic (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ATTLIST inlinegraphic srcedit CDATA #IMPLIED
| |
− | format (GIF| JPEG) #IMPLIED
| |
− | fileref CDATA #IMPLIED
| |
− | width CDATA "80%"
| |
− | depth CDATA #IMPLIED
| |
− | scale CDATA #IMPLIED
| |
− | scalefit CDATA #IMPLIED>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT caption (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- an equation is a formal mathematical equation (with an optional title). -->
| |
− | <!ELEMENT equation (caption?,alt?,graphic!)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ATTLIST equation label ID #IMPLIED>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- informalequation is usually a mathematical equation or
| |
− | a group of related mathematical equations. -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT informalequation (alt?,graphicf)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- inlineequations are expressions that occur in the text flow. -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT inlineequation (alt?,graphic!)>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT alt (#PCDATA)>
| |
− | | |
− | <1 -********* ******************************* ****** ******** ************->
| |
− | | |
− | .... <!ELEMENT back_matter (appendix*, los*, bibliography?, glossary?, index?,
| |
− | distribution_list?) >
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT appendix (header,(section)*) >
| |
− | | |
− | <!ATTLIST appendix label ID #IMPLIED>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT bibliography (header,paragraph*) >
| |
− | | |
− | <!ATTLIST bibliography label ID #IMPLIED>
| |
− | | |
− | <!— list of symbol, abbrev. , acronym, etc —>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT los (header,losentry*) >
| |
− | | |
− | <!ATTLIST los label ID #IMPLIED>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- one entry of the list -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT losentry ((losterm|lossym),losdef) >
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- term to be defined -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT losterm (#PCDATA) >
| |
− | | |
− | <!— symbol to be defined —>
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT lossym (graphic) >
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- the definition of the term or the symbol -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT losdef (#PCDATA) >
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT index (header,indexentry*) >
| |
− | | |
− | <!ATTLIST index label ID #IMPLIED>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- one entry of index -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT indexentry (#PCDATA) >
| |
− | | |
− | <!ATTLIST indexentry reflabel IDREF #REQUIRED>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- distribution list -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT distribution_list (paragraph*) >
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT glossary (header,glossarydivl) >
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 68
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | <!ATTLIST glossary label ID #IMPLIED>
| |
− | | |
− | .<!-- A section of a glossary. A Glossary might be divided into sections
| |
− | | |
− | in order to group terms, perhaps alphabetically. -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT glossdiv (header,glossentry*) >
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- An entry of glossary -->
| |
− | | |
− | .<!ELEMENT glossentry (glossterm,acronym?,abbrev?,(glosssee|glossdef!)) >
| |
− | | |
− | <!ATTLIST glossentry id ID #IMPLIED >
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- the definition of the term is available from another term, i.e,
| |
− | they have the same definition. -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT glosssee (#PCDATA) >
| |
− | | |
− | <(ATTLIST glosssee otherterm IDREF #IMPLIED >
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT glossdef (paragraph,glossseealso*) >
| |
− | | |
− | <(ATTLIST glossdef subject CDATA #IMPLIED>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- glossary term -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT glossterm (#PCDATA) >
| |
− | | |
− | <(ATTLIST glossterm baseform CDATA #IMPLIED >
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT acronym (#PCDATA) >
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT abbrev (#PCDATA) >
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- see also, used when terms have some relationships -->
| |
− | | |
− | <!ELEMENT glossseealso (#PCDATA) >
| |
− | | |
− | <(ATTLIST glossseealso otherterm IDREF #IMPLIED >
| |
− | | |
− | SAMPLE XSL (STYLE SHEET)
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:stylesheet xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform"
| |
− | xmlns:fo="http://www.w3.org/199 9/XSL/Format"
| |
− | version='1.0 ' >
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="Z39-18">
| |
− | | |
− | <body>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select ="front_matter"/>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select ="body"/>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select ="back_matter"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </body>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match="front_matter">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates/>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- Display Table of Content -->
| |
− | | |
− | <DIV STYLE="background-color:yellow; color;white; padding:4px">
| |
− | | |
− | <SPAN STYLE="font-weight:bold; color:black">
| |
− | | |
− | <b><h2XP ALIGN= "CENTER">TABLE OF C0NTENTS</PX/h2></b></SPAN>
| |
− | | |
− | </DIV>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:for-each select="//body/*/section| //body/references|
| |
− | | |
− | //back_matter/appendix| //back_matter/los| //backjnatter/bibliography|
| |
− | | |
− | //back_matter/glossary| //back_matter/index">
| |
− | | |
− | <emXPXULXLl>
| |
− | | |
− | <a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:attribute name="href">
| |
− | | |
− | #<xsl:value-of select="@label"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:attribute>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select = "header"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:for-each select="section">
| |
− | | |
− | <emXPXULXL2>
| |
− | | |
− | <a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:attribute name="href">
| |
− | | |
− | #<xsl:value-of select="@label"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:attribute>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select = "header"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </a>
| |
− | | |
− | </L2x/ULx/Px/em>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:for-each>
| |
− | | |
− | </Llx/ULx/Px/em>
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 69
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | </xsl:for-each>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- Display List of Figures -->
| |
− | | |
− | <DIV STYLE="background-color:yellow; color;white; padding:4px">
| |
− | <SPAN STYLE="font-weight:bold; color:black">
| |
− | | |
− | <bxh2><p ALIGN= "CENTER">LIST OF Figures</PX/h2x/b>
| |
− | | |
− | </SPAN>
| |
− | | |
− | </DIV>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:for-each select="//body//figure">
| |
− | | |
− | <em><PXULXLl >
| |
− | | |
− | <a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:attribute name="href">
| |
− | | |
− | #<xsl:value-of select="@label"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:attribute>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select = "caption"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </a>
| |
− | | |
− | </Llx/ULx/Px/em>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:for-each>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- Display List of Tables -->
| |
− | | |
− | <DIV STYLE="background-color;yellow; color;white; padding:4px">
| |
− | <SPAN STYLE="font-weight:bold; color:black">
| |
− | | |
− | <bXh2><P ALIGN= "CENTER">LIST OF Tables</P></h2x/b>
| |
− | | |
− | </SPAN>
| |
− | | |
− | </DIV>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:for-each select="//body//table">
| |
− | | |
− | <emxP><ULXLl >
| |
− | | |
− | <a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:attribute name="href">
| |
− | | |
− | #<xsl:value-of select="@label"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:attribute>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select = "caption"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </a>
| |
− | | |
− | </Llx/ULx/Px/em>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:for-each>
| |
− | | |
− | <!-- Display List of Tables -->
| |
− | | |
− | <DIV STYLE="background-color;yellow; color;white; padding:4px">
| |
− | <SPAN STYLE="font-weight:bold; color:black">
| |
− | | |
− | <bXh2><P ALIGN="CENTER">LIST OF Equations</PX/h2x/b>
| |
− | | |
− | </SPAN>
| |
− | | |
− | </DIV>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:for-each select="//body//equation">
| |
− | | |
− | <em><PXULXLl >
| |
− | | |
− | <a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:attribute name="href">
| |
− | | |
− | #<xsl:value-of select="@label"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:attribute>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select = "@label"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </a>
| |
− | | |
− | </Llx/ULx/Px/em>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:for-each>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl;template match ="preface">
| |
− | | |
− | <h3 ALIGN="CENTER" style="background-color;gray">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select="header"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </h3>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select="paragraph"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="metadata">
| |
− | | |
− | <DIV STYLE="background-color;teal; color:white; padding:4px">
| |
− | <SPAN STYLE="font-weight:bold; color:white">
| |
− | | |
− | <hl> Metadata </hl>
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 70
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | </SPAN>
| |
− | | |
− | </DIV>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates
| |
− | <xsl:apply-templates
| |
− | <xsl:apply-templates
| |
− | <xsl:apply-templates
| |
− | <xsl:apply-templates
| |
− | <xsl:apply-templates
| |
− | <xsl:apply-templates
| |
− | <xsl:apply-templates
| |
− | <xsl:apply-templates
| |
− | <xsl:apply-templates
| |
− | <xsl:apply-templates
| |
− | <xsl:apply-templates
| |
− | <xsl:apply-templates
| |
− | <xsl:apply-templates
| |
− | <xsl:apply-templates
| |
− | <xsl:apply-templates
| |
− | <xsl:apply-templates
| |
− | <xsl:apply-templates
| |
− | <xsl:apply-templates
| |
− | <xsl:apply-templates
| |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | select
| |
− | | |
− | select
| |
− | | |
− | select
| |
− | | |
− | select
| |
− | | |
− | select
| |
− | | |
− | select
| |
− | | |
− | select
| |
− | | |
− | select
| |
− | | |
− | select
| |
− | | |
− | select
| |
− | | |
− | select
| |
− | | |
− | select
| |
− | | |
− | select
| |
− | | |
− | select
| |
− | | |
− | select
| |
− | | |
− | select
| |
− | | |
− | select
| |
− | | |
− | select
| |
− | | |
− | select
| |
− | | |
− | select
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ="report_no"/>
| |
− | | |
− | ="title"/>
| |
− | | |
− | ="seriesinfo"/>
| |
− | | |
− | ^"creator"/>
| |
− | | |
− | ="abstract"/>
| |
− | | |
− | ="perform_org"/>
| |
− | ="sponsor_org"/>
| |
− | ="publishinfo/place"/>
| |
− | | |
− | = "pub li shin fo/pub Usher "/>
| |
− | ="publishinfo/date"/>
| |
− | ="type"/>
| |
− | | |
− | ="coverage"/>
| |
− | | |
− | ="contract_no"/>
| |
− | | |
− | ="subject"/>
| |
− | | |
− | ="copyright"/>
| |
− | ="distribution"/>
| |
− | | |
− | ="code"/>
| |
− | | |
− | ="cover"/>
| |
− | ="copyrightpage"/>
| |
− | ="reportdocument"/>
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match
| |
− | | |
− | = "seriesinfo|creator|type|coverage|contract^no|subj ect|copyright|distribution|language"
| |
− | >
| |
− | | |
− | <title> <xsl:value-of select="node()"/> </title>
| |
− | | |
− | <table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
| |
− | | |
− | <tr><td width="160" valign="top" bgcolor="#E5E5E5">
| |
− | | |
− | <bxi><xsl: value-of select=" local-name () "/x/ix/bx/td>
| |
− | | |
− | <td bgcolor=" #FFFFFF">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates/>
| |
− | | |
− | </td>
| |
− | | |
− | </tr>
| |
− | | |
− | </table>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="cover|reportdocument|copyrightpage">
| |
− | | |
− | <p>addition information for <xsl:value-of select="local-name()"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </p>
| |
− | | |
− | <ul >
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:for-each select="*">
| |
− | | |
− | <li>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="local-name()"/> : <xsl:value-of select="."/>
| |
− | | |
− | </li>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:for-each>
| |
− | | |
− | </ul>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="code">
| |
− | | |
− | <title> <xsl:value-of select="node()"/> </title>
| |
− | | |
− | <table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
| |
− | <trxtd width="160" valign="top" bgcolor="#E5E5E5">
| |
− | <bxi>Code (<xsl: value-of select="@type"/>) </ix/bx/td>
| |
− | <td bgcolor="#FFFFFF">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="."/>
| |
− | | |
− | </td>
| |
− | | |
− | </tr>
| |
− | | |
− | </table>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="report_no">
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 71
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | <title> <xsl:value-of select="node()"/> </title>
| |
− | <table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
| |
− | <tr><td width="160" valign="top" bgcolor="#E5E5E5">
| |
− | <bxi>Report Number</ix/bx/td>
| |
− | | |
− | <td bgcolor=" #FFFFFF">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates/>
| |
− | | |
− | </td>
| |
− | | |
− | </tr>
| |
− | | |
− | </table>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="title">
| |
− | | |
− | <title> <xsl:value-of select="node()"/> </title>
| |
− | <table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
| |
− | <trxtd width="160" valign="top" bgcolor="#E5E5E5">
| |
− | <bxi>Title</ix/bx/td>
| |
− | | |
− | <td bgcolor=" #FFFFFF">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates/>
| |
− | | |
− | </td>
| |
− | | |
− | </tr>
| |
− | | |
− | </table>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="publisher">
| |
− | | |
− | <title> <xsl:value-of select="node()"/> </title>
| |
− | <table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
| |
− | <trxtd width="160" valign="top" bgcolor="#E5E5E5">
| |
− | <bxi>Publisher</ix/bx/td>
| |
− | | |
− | <td bgcolor=" #FFFFFF" >
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates/>
| |
− | | |
− | </td>
| |
− | | |
− | </tr>
| |
− | | |
− | </table>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="date">
| |
− | | |
− | <title> <xsl:value-of select="node()"/> </title>
| |
− | <table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
| |
− | <trxtd width="160" valign="top" bgcolor="#E5E5E5">
| |
− | <bxi>Date</i></bx/td>
| |
− | | |
− | <td bgcolor=" #FFFFFF" >
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates/>
| |
− | | |
− | </td>
| |
− | | |
− | </tr>
| |
− | | |
− | </table>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="abstract">
| |
− | | |
− | <title> <xsl:value-of select="node()"/> </title>
| |
− | <table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
| |
− | <trxtd width="160" valign="top" bgcolor="#E5E5E5">
| |
− | <bxi>Abstract</ix/bx/td>
| |
− | | |
− | <td bgcolor=" #FFFFFF" >
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates/>
| |
− | | |
− | </td>
| |
− | | |
− | </tr>
| |
− | | |
− | </table>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="perform_org">
| |
− | | |
− | <title> <xsl:value-of select="node()"/> </title>
| |
− | <table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
| |
− | <trxtd width="160" valign="top" bgcolor="#E5E5E5">
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 72
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | <bxi> Per forming Organization</i></bX/td>
| |
− | | |
− | <td bgcolor=" #FFFFFF">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates/>
| |
− | | |
− | </td>
| |
− | | |
− | </tr>
| |
− | | |
− | </table>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="sponsor_org">
| |
− | | |
− | <title> <xsl:value-of select="node()"/> </title>
| |
− | <table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
| |
− | <trxtd width="160" valign="top" bgcolor="#E5E5E5">
| |
− | <bxi>Sponsor</ix/bx/td>
| |
− | | |
− | <td bgcolor=" #FFFFFF" >
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates/>
| |
− | | |
− | </td>
| |
− | | |
− | </tr>
| |
− | | |
− | </table>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="place">
| |
− | | |
− | <title> <xsl:value-of select="node()"/> </title>
| |
− | <table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
| |
− | <trxtd width="160" valign="top" bgcolor="#E5E5E5">
| |
− | <bxi>Publishing Place</ix/bx/td>
| |
− | | |
− | <td bgcolor=" #FFFFFF">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates/>
| |
− | | |
− | </td>
| |
− | | |
− | </tr>
| |
− | | |
− | </table>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="subject">
| |
− | | |
− | <table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
| |
− | <trxtd width="160" valign="top" bgcolor="#E5E5E5">
| |
− | <bxi>Subj ect</ix/b>
| |
− | | |
− | <td bgcolor="#FFFFFF">
| |
− | | |
− | </td>
| |
− | | |
− | </td>
| |
− | | |
− | </tr>
| |
− | | |
− | </table>
| |
− | | |
− | <table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
| |
− | <trxtd width="160" valign="top" bgcolor="#E5E5E5">
| |
− | <bxix/ix/bx/td>
| |
− | | |
− | <td bgcolor="#FFFFFF">
| |
− | | |
− | <emxb>Categories: </bx/em>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select ="category"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </td>
| |
− | | |
− | </tr>
| |
− | | |
− | </table>
| |
− | | |
− | <table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
| |
− | <trxtd width="160" valign="top" bgcolor="#E5E5E5">
| |
− | <bxix/ix/bx/td>
| |
− | | |
− | <td bgcolor="#FFFFFF">
| |
− | | |
− | <emxb>Keywords: </bx/em>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select ="keyword"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </td>
| |
− | | |
− | </tr>
| |
− | | |
− | </table>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 73
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="category">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="node()"/>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:if test="category">
| |
− | | |
− | /
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select ="category"/>
| |
− | </xsl:if>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="keyword">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="node()"/>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:if test="position() < last()">
| |
− | | |
− | f
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:if>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="descrioption">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select ="abstract"/>
| |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="creation">
| |
− | | |
− | <bxem>Creation: </emx/b>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="lastmodefied">
| |
− | | |
− | <bxem> Last modefied:</emx/b>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | < I-************************************************************************->
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="body">
| |
− | | |
− | <DIV STYLE="background-color:teal; color:white; padding:4px">
| |
− | | |
− | <SPAN STYLE="font-weight:bold; color:white">
| |
− | | |
− | <hl> Document </hl>
| |
− | | |
− | </SPAN>
| |
− | | |
− | </DIV>
| |
− | | |
− | <hl><P ALIGN="CENTER"><xsl:value-of select="//metadata/title"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </Px/hl>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates />
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match
| |
− | | |
− | ="summary|introduction|methods|assumptions|procedures|results|conclusions!recommendatio
| |
− | ns ">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select="section"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="section">
| |
− | | |
− | <a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:attribute name="name">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="@label"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:attribute>
| |
− | | |
− | </a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="header">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:choose>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:when test="count(ancestor::node()/header) = 1">
| |
− | | |
− | <h2>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="node()"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </h2>
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 74
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | </xsl:when>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:when test="count((ancestor::node()/header)) = 2">
| |
− | | |
− | <h3>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="node()"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </h3>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:when>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:when test="count(ancestor::node()/header) = 3">
| |
− | | |
− | <h4><xsl:value-of select="node()"/></h4>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:when>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:otherwise>
| |
− | | |
− | <h5Xxsl: value-of select="node () "/></h5>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:otherwise>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:choose>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="paragraph">
| |
− | | |
− | <P>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates/>
| |
− | | |
− | </P>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="pagenumber">
| |
− | | |
− | <br/>
| |
− | | |
− | <DIV STYLE="background-color:teal; color:white; padding:4px">
| |
− | <SPAN STYLE="font-weight:bold; color:white">
| |
− | | |
− | <center>
| |
− | | |
− | - End of Page <xsl:value-of select="node()"/> -
| |
− | | |
− | </center>
| |
− | | |
− | </SPAN>
| |
− | | |
− | </DIV>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="list">
| |
− | | |
− | <ul >
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:for-each select="listitem">
| |
− | | |
− | <li><xsl: value-of select=" . "/x/li>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:for-each>
| |
− | | |
− | </ul>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="figure">
| |
− | | |
− | <a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:attribute name="name">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="@label"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:attribute>
| |
− | | |
− | </a>
| |
− | | |
− | <P ALIGN="CENTER">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select="graphic"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </P>
| |
− | | |
− | <P ALIGN="CENTER">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select="caption"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </P>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="equation">
| |
− | | |
− | <a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:attribute name="name">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="@label"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:attribute>
| |
− | | |
− | </a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select="graphic"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="inlineequation">
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 75
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select="graphic"/>
| |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="table">
| |
− | | |
− | <a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:attribute name="name">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="@label"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:attribute>
| |
− | | |
− | </a>
| |
− | | |
− | <P ALIGN="CENTER">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select="caption"/>
| |
− | </P>
| |
− | | |
− | <P ALIGN="CENTER">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select="graphic"/>
| |
− | </P>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="graphic">
| |
− | | |
− | <img>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:attribute name="src">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="@fileref"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:attribute>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:attribute name="width">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="@width"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:attribute>
| |
− | | |
− | </img>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="caption">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="node()"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="references">
| |
− | | |
− | <a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:attribute name="name">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="@label"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:attribute>
| |
− | | |
− | </a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select="header"/>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select="reference"/>
| |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="index">
| |
− | | |
− | <a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:attribute name="name">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="@label"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:attribute>
| |
− | | |
− | </a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select="header"/>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select="indexentry"/>
| |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="crossref|citation">
| |
− | | |
− | <a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:attribute name="href">
| |
− | | |
− | #<xsl:value-of select="@reflabel"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:attribute>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="."/>
| |
− | | |
− | </a>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="indexentry">
| |
− | | |
− | <P>
| |
− | | |
− | <a>
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 76
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | <xsl:attribute name="href">
| |
− | | |
− | #<xsl:value-of select="@reflabel"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:attribute>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="."/>
| |
− | | |
− | </a>
| |
− | | |
− | </p>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="reference">
| |
− | | |
− | <P>
| |
− | | |
− | <L1 >
| |
− | | |
− | <a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:attribute name="name">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="@label"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:attribute>
| |
− | | |
− | </a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="node()"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </Ll>
| |
− | | |
− | </P>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="indexterm">
| |
− | | |
− | <a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:attribute name="name">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="@label"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:attribute>
| |
− | | |
− | </a>
| |
− | | |
− | <SPAN STYLE="font-weight:bold; color;red">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="node()"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </SPAN>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl;template match="back_matter">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match ="los">
| |
− | | |
− | <a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:attribute name="name">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="@label"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:attribute>
| |
− | | |
− | </a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select="header"/>
| |
− | | |
− | <table>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:for-each select="losentry">
| |
− | | |
− | <tr>
| |
− | | |
− | <tdxb><xsl: value-of select="losterm" /x/bx/td>
| |
− | | |
− | <td><xsl:value-of select="losdef"/></td>
| |
− | | |
− | </tr>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:for-each>
| |
− | | |
− | </table>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl;template match="appendix">
| |
− | | |
− | <a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:attribute name="name">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="@label"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:attribute>
| |
− | | |
− | </a>
| |
− | | |
− | <h3 ALIGN="CENTER" style="background-color;gray">
| |
− | | |
− | Appendix <xsl:apply-templates select="@labe1"/>:<xsl:apply-templates
| |
− | select="header"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </h3>
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 77
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select="section"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match="bibliography|index">
| |
− | | |
− | <a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:attribute name="name">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="@label"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:attribute>
| |
− | | |
− | </a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates />
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match="glossary">
| |
− | | |
− | <a>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:attribute name="name">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:value-of select="@label"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:attribute>
| |
− | | |
− | </a>
| |
− | | |
− | <h3 ALIGN="CENTER" style="background-color:gray">
| |
− | | |
− | Glossary :<xsl:apply-templates select="header"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </h3>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select="glossdiv"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match="glossdiv">
| |
− | | |
− | <p>....</p>
| |
− | | |
− | <p>-
| |
− | | |
− | <b><xsl: apply-templates select="header"/x/b>-
| |
− | | |
− | </p>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select="glossentry"/>
| |
− | | |
− | <p>....</p>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match="glossentry">
| |
− | | |
− | <pxb><xsl: value-of select="glossterm"/x/b><xsl: apply-templates
| |
− | select=" acronym" /x/p>
| |
− | | |
− | <blockquote>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select="abbrev"/>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select="glossdef"/>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select="glosssee"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </blockquote>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match="glossdef">
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select="paragraph"/>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:apply-templates select="glossseealso"/>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match="glosssee">
| |
− | | |
− | <p>Please see definition of <b><xsl: value-of select="@otherterm"/x/bx/p>
| |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match="acronym">
| |
− | | |
− | (<b><xsl :value-of select=" . ”/x/b>)
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match="abbrev">
| |
− | | |
− | <p>Abbrev. <b><xsl: value-of select=" . "/x/bx/p>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | <xsl:template match="glossseealso">
| |
− | | |
− | <p>See also <b><xsl: value-of select="@otherterm"/x/bx/p>
| |
− | | |
− | </xsl:template>
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 78
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | </xsl:stylesheet>
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 79
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Index
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | This is a subject index to the conceptual and practical terms of report organization and design. It
| |
− | covers only the Standard itself. The front matter and appendixes are not indexed. The index refers
| |
− | readers to section, figure (f.), and table (t.) numbers, not page numbers. Section numbers referring to
| |
− | passages of significant interest or length are set in bold face type. Compiled by Jane L. Cohen
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI standards, 2.1
| |
− | abbreviations and acronyms, 6.5, 6.9
| |
− | in abstracts, 5.1.6
| |
− | in back matter, 5.3
| |
− | in figures, 6.2.2
| |
− | in summaries, 5.2.1
| |
− | in titles, 5.1.2.2
| |
− | lists, t. 1, 5.3.3, 6.9.1
| |
− | tables of contents, f. 6
| |
− | abstracts, t. 1, 5.1.6, 5.2.1
| |
− | | |
− | on report documentation pages, 5.1.5
| |
− | tables of contents, f. 6
| |
− | academic degrees of authors
| |
− | See authors, affiliations
| |
− | access, 3.2-3.3, 3.9, 4.2.3, 6.1.3
| |
− | restrictions, 5.1.3
| |
− | | |
− | See also discovery; publication and distribution
| |
− | acknowledgements, t. 1, 5.1.11
| |
− | in preface, 5.1.10
| |
− | acronyms
| |
− | | |
− | See abbreviations and acronyms
| |
− | administrative information, 4.3
| |
− | administrative metadata, t.1, 4.2.3
| |
− | affiliations of authors
| |
− | | |
− | See authors, affiliations
| |
− | American National Standards, 2.1
| |
− | apparatus
| |
− | | |
− | See scientific apparatus and instruments
| |
− | appendices, t. 1, 5.3.1, 6.2.1
| |
− | Arabic numbers, 5.1.2.2, 5.2.7, 6.2.1, 6.4.1, 6.5,
| |
− | 6.7
| |
− | | |
− | arrangement
| |
− | | |
− | See numbering; organization; pagination
| |
− | assumptions
| |
− | | |
− | See methods, assumptions, and procedures
| |
− | audience, 1.1, 1.4, 3.5, 3.8, 5.1.4, 5.2, 5.2.2
| |
− | of preface, 5.1.10
| |
− | of summaries, 5.2.1
| |
− | impact on format indices, 5.3.5
| |
− | See also publication and distribution
| |
− | authors
| |
− | | |
− | affiliations, 5.1.2., 5.1.2.3
| |
− | | |
− | best practices, 1.5
| |
− | | |
− | of foreword, 5.1.9
| |
− | | |
− | of prefaces, 5.1.10
| |
− | | |
− | of references, 5.2.7
| |
− | | |
− | ofreports, 5.1.1, 5.1.2, 5.1.2.3
| |
− | | |
− | See also compilers, performing organizations
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | back matter, t.1, 4.3, 5.1.5, 5.2.7, 5.3
| |
− | See also specific component names
| |
− | best practices, 1.5, 5.1.1, 5.1.2.2, 6.11.3
| |
− | bibliographic entries
| |
− | | |
− | See bibliographies, references
| |
− | bibliographies, t. 1, 5.2.7, 5.3, 5.3.1, 5.3.2, 6.8,
| |
− | 6.9.1
| |
− | | |
− | body of reports, t.1, 4.3, 5.2-5.2.7
| |
− | See also specific component names
| |
− | browsers, 6.2.1.2, 6.2.3.3
| |
− | | |
− | callouts, 6.2.2
| |
− | capitalization
| |
− | | |
− | in appendixes, 5.3.1
| |
− | in glossaries, 6.10
| |
− | in indexes, 6.11
| |
− | | |
− | of headings and subheadings, 6.1.1
| |
− | of Roman numerals, 6.4.2, 6.9.1
| |
− | of symbols, abbreviations, and acronyms, 6.9.1
| |
− | of units and numbers, 6.5
| |
− | captions, 5.2.4
| |
− | of figures, 6.2.2
| |
− | cardinal numbers, 6.5
| |
− | chapters
| |
− | | |
− | See sections
| |
− | charts
| |
− | | |
− | See figures
| |
− | | |
− | chemical notation and analysis
| |
− | | |
− | See scientific notation and analysis
| |
− | classified information, 3.4, 3.9, 5.1.1, 5.1.3, 5.3.6
| |
− | color, 6.2.2
| |
− | | |
− | substitutes, 6.2.2
| |
− | substitutes, sample, f. 7
| |
− | columns, 6.1.1, 6.3.1.1, 6.9.2, 6.11.2
| |
− | column heads, 6.2.3.1, 6.2.3.2
| |
− | compilers, 5.1.1, 5.1.2
| |
− | See also authors
| |
− | | |
− | components of reports, t. 1, 4.3-5.3.6
| |
− | See also specific component names
| |
− | computers, 3.6.1, 5.3.1, 6.6
| |
− | conclusions, t. 1, 5.2, 5.2.2, 5.2.4, 5.2.5
| |
− | in abstracts, 5.1.6
| |
− | in summaries, 5.2.1
| |
− | | |
− | contents section, t.1, 3.6.3, 4.2.2,5.1.5, 5.1.7,
| |
− | 5.1.8, 6.2.3.1
| |
− | pagination on, 6.4.2
| |
− | sample, f. 6
| |
− | | |
− | contract- and grant-funded research and reports,
| |
− | 5.1.2, 5.1.2.4, 3.1.3.1, 6.3
| |
− | numbering, 5.1.2
| |
− | | |
− | See also government-generated research and
| |
− | reports
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 80
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | copyrighted information, 3.4, 5.1.3.1
| |
− | covers, t. 1, 5.1.1, 4.3, 6.4.2
| |
− | | |
− | authors’/creators’ names on, 5.1.2.3
| |
− | samples, f. 2a, f. 3a
| |
− | titles on, 5.1.2
| |
− | | |
− | creation of reports, 3.4, 3.10, 4.3
| |
− | See also publication and distribution
| |
− | creators
| |
− | | |
− | See authors
| |
− | | |
− | credit lines, 5.1.3.1, 5.2.7
| |
− | | |
− | data elements
| |
− | on cover, 5.1.1
| |
− | on title pages, 5.1.2
| |
− | See also metadata
| |
− | | |
− | dates of publication, 5.1.1, 5.1.2, 5.2.7
| |
− | See also publication data
| |
− | decimal numbers, 6.1.1, 6.5
| |
− | descriptive metadata, t. 1, 4.2.1
| |
− | See also metadata
| |
− | design of reports, 1.1, 6-6.12
| |
− | | |
− | See also specific component or element names
| |
− | diagrams
| |
− | See figures
| |
− | | |
− | digital format, f. 1, 1.1, 3.1, 3.6, 3.9, 5.1.4, 6.1.3,
| |
− | 6.4.1
| |
− | | |
− | access, 3.9
| |
− | discovery, 3.5
| |
− | distribution, 3.9
| |
− | errata, 6.12.3
| |
− | | |
− | figures and tables, 6.2.1, 6.2.2
| |
− | table of contents, 5.1.7
| |
− | See also, DTD; format; metadata; XML; XSL
| |
− | disclaimers, 5.1.3.1, 5.1.3.2
| |
− | discovery, 3.5, 3.10, 4.2.1
| |
− | discussion
| |
− | | |
− | See results and discussion
| |
− | display
| |
− | | |
− | See presentation and display
| |
− | dissemination, 3.8, 5.1.3.1
| |
− | | |
− | See also access, publication and distribution
| |
− | distribution
| |
− | | |
− | See access, audience; dissemination; publication
| |
− | and distribution
| |
− | Document Type Definition
| |
− | See DTD
| |
− | | |
− | draft reports, 5.1.3.2
| |
− | | |
− | DTD, f.1, 1.1, 3.6, 3.6.1, 3.10
| |
− | | |
− | editors, 5.1.1, 5.1.2, 5.1.2.3, 5.1.10
| |
− | See also authors
| |
− | elements of reports, t. 1, 3
| |
− | | |
− | optional, conditional and required, t. 1, 5-5.3.6
| |
− | See also specific element names
| |
− | endnotes, 6.7
| |
− | | |
− | See also footnotes
| |
− | | |
− | equations, f. 9, f 10, 5.3.1, 6.3.1.2, 6.6, 6.12.1
| |
− | See also formulas
| |
− | equipment
| |
− | | |
− | See printing equipment; scientific apparatus and
| |
− | instruments
| |
− | | |
− | errata, 5.3.6, 6.12-6.12.3
| |
− | executive summaries, 5.1.6, 5.2.1
| |
− | Extensible Markup Language.
| |
− | | |
− | See XML
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | figures, 5.1, 5.2.4, 5.2.7, 5.3.1, 6.2.2.
| |
− | legibility and reproducibility, 6.2.1-6.2.1.1
| |
− | lists, t. 1, 5.1.8
| |
− | numbering, 6.5
| |
− | sample, f. 7
| |
− | See also tables
| |
− | fonts, 6.1.1, 6.3.1.2
| |
− | | |
− | See also, graphic techniques; image area;
| |
− | indentation and spacing; legibility; lines; margins;
| |
− | readability; superscripts and subscripts
| |
− | footnotes, 5.2.7, 6.2.2, 6.2.3.1, 6.7
| |
− | See also endnotes
| |
− | | |
− | format information, f.1, t. 1, 3.6-3.7, 4.2.3, 5.14
| |
− | See also, administrative metadata, design of
| |
− | reports; digital format; page format
| |
− | formulas, 6.2.2, 6.3.1.2, 6.6, 6.12.1
| |
− | See also equations
| |
− | forewords, t. 1, 5.1.9
| |
− | | |
− | front matter, t. 1, 4.3, 5.1-5.1.11, 6.4.2, 6.5.
| |
− | | |
− | See also specific component names
| |
− | | |
− | glossaries, t. 1, 5.3.4, 6.10
| |
− | government-generated research and reports
| |
− | copyright, 5.1.3.1
| |
− | distribution lists, 5.3.6
| |
− | notices, 5.1.3.2
| |
− | numbering, 5.1.2.1
| |
− | report documentation pages, 5.1.5
| |
− | referencing, 5.2.7
| |
− | | |
− | See also contract- and grant-funded research and
| |
− | reports
| |
− | | |
− | grant-funded research and reports
| |
− | | |
− | See contract- and grant-funded research and
| |
− | reports
| |
− | | |
− | graphic techniques, 6.2.1, 6.2.2, 6.3
| |
− | sample, f. 7
| |
− | See also figures, fonts
| |
− | graphs
| |
− | | |
− | See figures
| |
− | | |
− | headers and footers, 6.3.2.1-6.3.2.2, 6.4.2
| |
− | headings and subheadings, 5.1.7, 5.3.5, 6.1.1,
| |
− | 6.2.3.1, 6.4.2
| |
− | | |
− | See also indexes; sections; subject matter; terms
| |
− | | |
− | illustrations
| |
− | See figures
| |
− | | |
− | image area, 6.2.1.1, 6.3.2.1
| |
− | indentation and spacing, 6.1.1, 6.3.1
| |
− | in bibliographies and references, 6.8
| |
− | in formulas and equations, 6.6
| |
− | in glossaries, 6.10
| |
− | in indexes, 6.11.1
| |
− | | |
− | See also fonts; image area; lines; margins
| |
− | indices, t. 1, 5.3.5, 6.11-6.11.3
| |
− | | |
− | See also headings and subheadings
| |
− | ink, 6.3.2.3
| |
− | instruments
| |
− | | |
− | See scientific apparatus and instruments
| |
− | International System of Units (SI), 6.5
| |
− | interoperability, 3.3
| |
− | | |
− | See also digital format, DTD, metadata,
| |
− | persistence
| |
− | | |
− | introductions, t. 1, 4.1, 5.2.2
| |
− | investigators, 5.1.1, 5.1.2.3
| |
− | See also authors
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 81
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | laser printers, 6.3.2.4
| |
− | legibility, 6.2.2, 6.3.2.3
| |
− | | |
− | See also fonts, page format
| |
− | length
| |
− | | |
− | of abstracts, 5.1.6
| |
− | of executive summaries, 5.1.6
| |
− | of formulas and equations, 6.6
| |
− | of lines, 6.3.1.1
| |
− | of reports, 6.4.1
| |
− | of summary, 5.2.1
| |
− | See also size
| |
− | | |
− | lines, 6.3.1.1, 6.6, 6.8, 6.10
| |
− | links, 3.2, 3.10, 6.1.3, 6.2.1
| |
− | in indices, 5.3.5, 6.11.3
| |
− | in references, 5.2.7
| |
− | in table of contents, 5.1.7
| |
− | lists
| |
− | | |
− | distribution lists, t. 1, 5.3.6
| |
− | of figures and tables, t. 1, 5.1.8
| |
− | of recommendations, 5.2.6
| |
− | of references, t. 1, 5.2.7, 6.8
| |
− | of subheadings, 5.1.7
| |
− | | |
− | of symbols, abbreviations, and acronyms, t. 1,
| |
− | 5.3.3, 6.9.1
| |
− | | |
− | of terms. See glossaries
| |
− | | |
− | maintenance and preservation, 3.10
| |
− | margins, 6.3.1.1, 6.3.2.2
| |
− | | |
− | mathematical notation and analysis, 5.3.1, 6.2.3.1,
| |
− | 6.3.1.2, 6.5
| |
− | | |
− | See also scientific notation and analysis
| |
− | measurement
| |
− | | |
− | See units of measurement
| |
− | media, 1.1, 3.3, 3.10
| |
− | | |
− | metadata, t. 1, 3.1, 3.6.2-3.6.3, 4.2-4.2.3, 4.3
| |
− | for access, 3.9
| |
− | for creation, 3.4
| |
− | for discovery, 3.5
| |
− | for publication and distribution, 3.9
| |
− | schema. See DTD
| |
− | See also specific types of metadata
| |
− | methods, assumptions, and procedures, t. 1, 4.2,
| |
− | 5.2.3
| |
− | | |
− | in abstracts, 5.1.6
| |
− | units of measurement used in, 6.5
| |
− | multimedia
| |
− | See media
| |
− | | |
− | multi-volume sets, 5.1.2.2, 6.4.2
| |
− | | |
− | National Technical Information Service (NTIS)
| |
− | numbers, 5.2.7
| |
− | notation
| |
− | | |
− | See mathematical notation and analysis, scientific
| |
− | notation and analysis
| |
− | notices, t. 1, 5.1.3.2
| |
− | sample, f. 4
| |
− | numbering, 6.5
| |
− | appendixes, 5.3.1
| |
− | | |
− | figures and tables, 5.1.8, 6.2.1, 6.2.2, 6.2.3.1,
| |
− | | |
− | 6 . 2 . 3.2
| |
− | | |
− | footnotes and endnotes, 6.7
| |
− | formulas and equations, 6.6
| |
− | government-generated reports, 5.2.7
| |
− | headings and subheadings, 6.1.1
| |
− | multi-volume sets, 5.1.2.2
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | numbering (continued)
| |
− | recommendations, 5.2.6
| |
− | references, 5.2.7
| |
− | reports, 5.1.1, 5.1.2, 5.1.2.1
| |
− | series, 5.1.2.1
| |
− | | |
− | See also organization; pagination
| |
− | numbers, 6.5
| |
− | | |
− | See also specific types of numbers
| |
− | opinions, 5.2.5
| |
− | | |
− | optional elements, t. 1, 4.3, 5.1.1-5.1.10, 5.3.5
| |
− | | |
− | ordinal numbers, 6.5
| |
− | | |
− | organization
| |
− | | |
− | of appendixes, 5.3.1
| |
− | of bibliographies, 5.3.2
| |
− | of figures and tables, 6.2.2-6.2.3.2
| |
− | of formulas and equations, 6.6
| |
− | of glossaries, 5.3.4, 6.10
| |
− | of headings and subheadings, 6.1.1
| |
− | of indexes, 5.3.5
| |
− | of references, 5.2.7
| |
− | ofreports, t. 1, 1.1, 4.3, 5-5.3.6
| |
− | of symbols, abbreviations, and acronyms, 5.3.3
| |
− | See also specific report components
| |
− | orientation
| |
− | | |
− | of figures and tables, 6.2.1.1
| |
− | page format, 6.3.2.1, 6.4.2, 6.11.2
| |
− | | |
− | See also fonts; format information; indentation and
| |
− | spacing; ink; legibility; lines; margins; paper;
| |
− | printing equipment; readability; reproducibility
| |
− | pagination^.1.7, 6.1.2, 6.4.1-6.4.2, 6.5
| |
− | See also numbering; organization
| |
− | paper, 3.10, 6.3.2.3
| |
− | percentages, 6.5
| |
− | | |
− | performing organizations, 5.1.2, 5.1.2.1, 5.1.2.4
| |
− | See also sponsoring organizations
| |
− | persistence, 3.2
| |
− | | |
− | See also interoperability; maintenance and
| |
− | preservation; metadata
| |
− | photographs
| |
− | See figures
| |
− | | |
− | prefaces, t. 1, 5.1.7, 5.1.10, 5.2.2, 6.4.2
| |
− | presentation and display, t. 1, 3.3, 3.7, 6.3, 3.10,
| |
− | 6 . 1.1
| |
− | | |
− | in digital format, f. 1, 3.6
| |
− | | |
− | of formulas and equations, 6.6
| |
− | | |
− | See also DTD, elements of reports; media, XML,
| |
− | | |
− | XSL
| |
− | | |
− | preservation
| |
− | | |
− | See maintenance and preservation
| |
− | printing equipment, 6.3.2.4
| |
− | Privacy Act of 1974, 5.3.6
| |
− | procedures
| |
− | | |
− | See methods, assumptions, and procedures
| |
− | proprietary information, 5.1.1, 5.1.3.1-5.1.3.2, 5.3.6
| |
− | publication and distribution, 3.8-3.9, 5.1.2.4
| |
− | distribution lists, t. 1, 5.3.6
| |
− | distribution notices, 5.1.3.2
| |
− | distribution notices, sample, f. 4
| |
− | restricted distribution, t. 1, 3.9, 5.1.1
| |
− | See also audience; government-generated
| |
− | research and reports; sponsoring organizations
| |
− | publication data, 1.2, 3.1, 3.7, 3.10, 5.1.2, 5.2.7
| |
− | See also metadata, XSL
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | Page 82
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | purposes, 1.1, 5.1
| |
− | in abstracts, 5.1.6
| |
− | in introductions, 5.2.2
| |
− | in prefaces, 5.1.10
| |
− | in summaries, 5.2.1
| |
− | See also scope; subject matter
| |
− | | |
− | readability, 6.3
| |
− | | |
− | See also fonts, format information, page format
| |
− | readership
| |
− | | |
− | See audience; publication and distribution
| |
− | reagents, 5.2.3
| |
− | | |
− | See also scientific apparatus and instruments
| |
− | recommendations, t. 1, 5.2, 5.2.6
| |
− | in abstracts, 5.1.6
| |
− | in summaries, 5.2.1
| |
− | references, 5.2.7, 5.3, 6.8
| |
− | in bibliographies, 5.3.2
| |
− | in tables, 6.2.3.1
| |
− | links, 6.11.3
| |
− | | |
− | lists, t. 1, 5.2.7, 5.3.2, 6.8
| |
− | metadata, 4.2.1
| |
− | | |
− | report documentation pages, t. 1, 5.1.5
| |
− | abstracts on, 5.1.6
| |
− | authors'/creators’ names on, 5.1.2.3
| |
− | titles on, 5.1.2, 5.1.2.2
| |
− | report numbers, 5.1.1, 5.1.2, 5.1.2.1
| |
− | reports
| |
− | | |
− | See scientific and technical reports
| |
− | reproducibility, 6.2.2, 6.3.2.3
| |
− | | |
− | See also fonts; interoperability; page format
| |
− | required elements, t. 1, 4.3, 5.1.2, 5.1.6-5.1.8,
| |
− | | |
− | 5.2.1-5.2.5
| |
− | research
| |
− | | |
− | See conclusions; contract- and grant- funded
| |
− | research and reports; government-funded research
| |
− | and reports; methods, assumptions, and
| |
− | procedures; performing organizations;
| |
− | recommendations; results and discussion; scientific
| |
− | apparatus and instruments; scientific notation and
| |
− | analysis; sponsoring organizations; test techniques
| |
− | restricted distribution
| |
− | | |
− | See publication and distribution
| |
− | results and discussion, t. 1, 5.2, 5.2.4
| |
− | in abstracts, 5.1.6
| |
− | in conclusions, 5.2.5
| |
− | in summaries, 5.2.1
| |
− | Roman numerals, 6.4.2, 6.5
| |
− | rows, 6.2.3.1—6.2.3.2
| |
− | row heads, 6.2.3.1
| |
− | | |
− | SI units, 6.5
| |
− | schematic drawings
| |
− | See figures
| |
− | | |
− | scientific and technical reports
| |
− | definitions, 1.1
| |
− | | |
− | numbering, 5.1.1, 5.1.2, 5.1.2.1
| |
− | other publications useful in preparing, 2.3
| |
− | other standards useful in preparing, 2.1-2.2
| |
− | standard for, 5.1.2.1
| |
− | | |
− | See also contract- and grant-funded research and
| |
− | reports; design of reports; elements of reports;
| |
− | government-generated research and reports;
| |
− | organization, of reports
| |
− | | |
− | scientific apparatus and instruments, 5.2.3, 5.3.1
| |
− | | |
− | | |
− | scientific notation and analysis, 5.3.1, 6.2.2, 6.5, 6.6,
| |
− | 6.9.1
| |
− | | |
− | See also mathematical notation and analysis; units
| |
− | of measurement
| |
− | scope, 1.3, 5.1
| |
− | | |
− | in abstracts, 5.1.6
| |
− | in indices, 5.3.5
| |
− | in introductions, 5.2.2
| |
− | in prefaces, 5.1.10
| |
− | in summaries, 5.2.1
| |
− | See also purposes; subject matter
| |
− | sections, t.1, 5.1.2-5.3.6
| |
− | | |
− | See also headings and subheadings; text matter
| |
− | series, 5.1.1, 5.1.2, 5.1.2.2 5.1.9
| |
− | size
| |
− | | |
− | of figures and tables, 6.2.1.1, 6.2.2
| |
− | of font, 6.3.1.2
| |
− | of image area, 6.3.2.1
| |
− | of margins, 6.3.2.2
| |
− | of paper, 6.3.2.3
| |
− | See also length
| |
− | software, 3.4, 3.7, 5.1.4
| |
− | | |
− | for formulas and equations, 6.6
| |
− | metadata, 4.2.3
| |
− | proprietary, 3.5
| |
− | See also format information
| |
− | sources of information
| |
− | | |
− | See bibliographies; lists, of references; references
| |
− | spacing
| |
− | | |
− | See indentation and spacing
| |
− | sponsoring organizations, 5.1.1, 5.1.2, 5.1.2.1,
| |
− | | |
− | 5.1.2.4, 5.1.3.1
| |
− | Standard Form 298
| |
− | | |
− | See report documentation pages
| |
− | structural metadata, t.1, 4.2.2
| |
− | style sheets
| |
− | See XSL
| |
− | | |
− | subject matter, 3.5, 4.2.1, 5.1.2, 5.2.2
| |
− | | |
− | See also headings and subheadings; purposes;
| |
− | scope; terms
| |
− | | |
− | subordination, 6.1-6.1.1, 6.3
| |
− | See also design of reports
| |
− | summaries, t. 1, 5.2.1
| |
− | | |
− | See also executive summaries
| |
− | superscripts and subscripts, 6.2.2, 6.2.3.1, 6.6, 6.7,
| |
− | 6.9.1
| |
− | | |
− | symbols, 6.3.1.2, 6.9.1, 6.9.2
| |
− | in abstracts, 5.1.6
| |
− | in figures, 6.2.6
| |
− | in footnotes, 6.7
| |
− | in formulas and equations, 6.6
| |
− | lists, t. 1, 5.3.3
| |
− | in summaries, 5.2.1
| |
− | in tables, 6.2.3.1
| |
− | in units of measurement, 6.5
| |
− | | |
− | tables, 5.2.4, 5.2.7, 6.2.1, 6.2.3-6.2.3.3
| |
− | footnotes to, 6.2.3.1
| |
− | in appendices, 5.3.1 | |
− | lists, t. 1, 5.1.8
| |
− | numbering, 6.2.1
| |
− | oversized, 6.2.1.1
| |
− | sample, f. 8
| |
− | See also figures
| |
− | tables of contents
| |
− | | |
− | See contents section
| |
− | | |
| | | |
− | ©2005 NISO
| + | ===Body Matter=== |
| + | :The body is the part of the report in which the creator describes methods, assumptions, and procedures, then presents and discusses the results and draws conclusions and recommends actions based on those results. The organization of a report depends on its subject matter and audience as well as its purpose. (See Appendix D for sample organizational models.) Thus, the organization of the content may vary widely and the organization of the report may be divided into sections or chapters. Information on the content follows. |
| | | |
| + | :The ''Standard'' further discusses (1) '''[[document summary|summary]]''', (2) '''[[Report stage-setting section|introduction]]''', (3) '''[[Report undertaking section|methods, assumptions, and procedures]]''', (4) '''[[Report finding|results and discussion]]''', (5) '''[[Report interpretation|conclusions]]''', (6) '''[[report recommendation|recommendations]]''', and (7) '''[[document reference|references]]''' in details. |
| | | |
− | Page 83
| + | ===Back Matter=== |
| + | :The back matter supplements and clarifies the body of the report (for example, appendices), makes the body easier to use (for example, glossary, lists of symbols, abbreviations and acronyms, and index), and shows where additional information can be found (for example, bibliography). Some organizations consider the reference section to be part of the back matter; if the pages following the front matter are numbered sequentially, it is immaterial to the reader if the reference or bibliography section is part of the body or the back matter. |
| | | |
| + | :The ''Standard'' further discusses (1) '''[[document appendix|appendices]]''', (2) '''[[document bibliography|bibliography]]''', (3) '''[[report token|list(s) of symbols, abbreviations, and acronyms]]''', (4) '''[[document glossary|glossary]]''', (5) '''[[document index|index]]''', and (6) '''[[distribution metadata|distribution list]]''' in details. |
| | | |
| + | ==Presentation and Display== |
| + | This section discusses standard methods for ensuring consistency in presentation: designing visual and tabular matter; formatting; presenting units, numbers, formulas, and equations; incorporating footnotes, endnotes, references, and bibliographic entries; preparing [[report token|lists of symbols, abbreviations, and acronyms]]; formatting glossaries and indexes; and correcting errata after publication. Within each subsection, a distinction is made between rules applicable to all reports regardless of mode of publication (e.g., paper or Web) and rules applicable to reports published in paper form. |
| | | |
− | ANSI/NISO Z39.18-2005 (R2010)
| + | ===Subordination=== |
| + | :;General |
| + | ::Indicate subordination of ideas by using headings and subheadings to divide the report into manageable sections, call attention to main topics, and signal changes in topics. Most reports require no more than five levels of headings. |
| | | |
| + | ::Consistency of presentation is important in showing subordinate relationships. Many reports use a decimal numbering system to show relationships and to simplify extensive cross-referencing. An alternate format for subordination uses a progression of fonts. Indicate headings and subheadings by bold font with initial capital letters for principal words. Indicate primary headings by using a larger font than that used for non-primary headings. Align primary and secondary headings flush with the left column of text and run in other headings with indented text. |
| | | |
− | terms, 5.1.3.2
| + | :;Print-Specific Guidelines |
| + | ::Begin each major section on a new page. |
| | | |
− | in glossaries, 5.3.4
| + | :;Non-Print-Specific |
− | in indices, 5.3.5, 6.11.3
| + | ::In the digital environment, delineate sections in a way that is easy to understand and access, with full links included as required. |
− | in summaries, 5.2.1 | |
| | | |
− | See also headings and subheadings; subject
| + | ===Designation=== |
− | matter
| + | :For ease of use and reference, delimit and uniquely identify segments of a report. For traditional paper reports, the segments are usually pages. For reports published in digital form, they may be pages, but are more likely to be paragraphs or screens. |
| | | |
− | test techniques, 5.3.1
| + | :Once the segments of a report have been determined, use consecutive Arabic numbers to designate them. When reproducing appendix information from another source, retain the designation of the original source in addition to designation for inclusion in the appendix. If a report is divided into sections or chapters because of its length or scope, number the text, exclusive of front matter and back matter, sequentially from one part to the next. |
− | text matter, t. 1, 5.2-5.2.7, 6.4.2
| |
− | in figures and tables, 6.2.2-6.2.3
| |
− | See also specific component and element names
| |
− | title section, t. 1, 5.1.2, 5.1.3.2
| |
| | | |
− | authors’/creators' names on, 5.1.2.3
| + | ===Units and Numbers=== |
− | organization names on, 5.1.2, 5.1.2.4
| + | :Present standard units of measurement clearly, concisely, and consistently in reports. The preferred standard for units is the International System of Units (SI). If another system is used, the corresponding SI units may appear in parentheses. If two systems of measurement are used, indicate the systems in the [[report undertaking section|"Methods, Assumptions, and Procedures" section]] and in a statement at the beginning of the [[report token|list of symbols, abbreviations, and acronyms]]. |
− | samples, f. 2b, f. 3b
| |
− | titles on, 5.1.2.2
| |
| | | |
− | titles and subtitles, 5.1.1, 5.1.2.2
| + | :Abbreviate units used with specific numbers (for example, 3.7 m) except where a potential exists for misinterpretation; otherwise, spell out units. For SI units derived from proper names, show the symbols in initial capital letters (for example, Hz and N); use lowercase letters for units that are spelled out (for example, hertz and newtons). Write SI symbols in singular form; IEEE/ASTM SI-10-2002, American National Standard for Use of the International System of Units (SI): The Modern Metric System, provides detailed information on using SI symbols and units. |
− | of appendices, 5.3.1 | |
| | | |
− | of figures and tables, 5.1.8, 6.2.2, 6.2.3.1-6.2.3.2 | + | :Always use Arabic numbers to express units of measurement and time in mathematical expressions, decimals, percentages, and proportions. For other expressions, the following apply: |
− | of references, 5.2.7 | + | :*If a sentence contains only one number and it is greater than nine, indicate it as a numeral; if a number is nine or less, spell it out. |
− | of reports, 5.1.2, 5.1.2.2
| + | :*Always spell out a number at the beginning of a sentence. |
− | of series, 5.1.2.2 | + | :*Use numerals for a group of two or more numbers if one of them is 10 or greater (for example, a capacitor having 3 leads, 2 pairs of controls, and 12 settings). |
| + | :*The same guidelines apply to ordinal numbers, but treat ordinals and cardinals separately if they appear together (for example, the 5th and 14th groups, containing six and seven items, respectively). |
| + | :*Use Arabic numbers for all numbering systems (page and section, table, figure, and reference numbers), except for roman-numeral pagination of front matter (for example, page iii). |
| | | |
| + | ===Formulas and Equations=== |
| + | :Present formulas and equations in sentence form and punctuate them for clarity and consistency; however, do not begin a sentence with a formula or equation. |
| | | |
− | topics
| + | :Clarify complicated mathematical formulas and derivations by defining symbols below the formula or derivation or as is customary in the discipline, relating equations to one another and describing the physical reality represented by the mathematics. Chemical symbols need not be defined unless the author/creator chooses to do so for clarification. Use marginal notes to identify modifications of symbols (for example, prime marks) and to distinguish between the letter "O" and "0" (zero); the letter "I" and the number "1"; the letter "x" and the multiplication sign (x). Clearly indicate superscripts and subscripts. |
| | | |
− | See headings and subheadings; subject matter;
| + | :Include brief formulas and equations as part of the text if the formula or equation fits on one line. If a formula or equation is displayed set off from the text, center or indent it, depending on its length. For consistent presentation and cross-referencing in a report with extensive notation, display and number all equations. Italicize formulas and equations, whether included as part of the text or displayed. |
− | terms
| |
| | | |
− | typography
| + | :Enclose equation numbers in parentheses at the right-hand margin with a minimum of 1/4 inch between the last term in the equation and the equation number. Place the equation number on the same line of a single-line equation and on the last line of a multi-line equation. |
| | | |
− | See fonts, graphic techniques; image area;
| + | :If a long formula or equation does not fit on a single line, break it before an operational sign (plus, minus, times, integral, etc.) or after an expression enclosed with parentheses, brackets, etc. |
− | indentation and spacing; legibility; lines; margins;
| |
− | readability; superscripts and subscripts
| |
− | type faces
| |
− | See fonts
| |
| | | |
− | units, of measurement, 6.2.3.1, 6.5
| + | :Use an extra line space between the lines when a formula or equation is carried over because of its length. A number of computer software packages supporting the presentation of equations automatically provide correct line spacing. |
| | | |
− | See also scientific notation and analysis
| + | :Define chemical symbols if definition enhances their comprehension. Use close spacing for chemical symbols, numbers, or line bonds in a formula. Chemical equations may be run in or displayed set off from text. Use roman (English) type rather than italics to form chemical symbols. If displayed, they should be numbered in sequence, and the equation numbers placed to the right of the reaction. Number chemical equations consecutively and independently of mathematical equations. |
| | | |
− | visual matter
| + | :If a chemical equation is too long to fit on one line, break it after the arrow. Align the first element of the runover line with the last element of the preceding line. Leave extra line spacing between the lowest part of the first line and the highest part of the next line. |
− | See figures
| |
| | | |
− | volumes, 5.1.2.2, 6.4.2
| + | ===Footnotes or Endnotes=== |
| + | :Include footnotes or endnotes in a report only to clarify information in the text; keep them as brief as possible. To avoid preparing footnotes or endnotes, incorporate material into the text by enclosing it in parentheses or placing it in a separate paragraph. |
| | | |
− | XML, f. 1, 1.1, 3.6.2, 3.10
| + | :Use superscript Arabic numbers to key notes to the portion of the text they clarify. Number notes consecutively through the text; place footnotes at the bottom of the page on which each occurs and place endnotes at the end of the section of text they clarify. If a footnote runs longer than its page margin, complete the footnote at the bottom of the subsequent page, preceding any footnote(s) for that page. If a footnote clarifies tabular information, use a superscript sequence of lowercase letters or symbols to avoid confusion with text footnotes. |
| | | |
− | See also digital format; DTD; XSL
| + | ===Errata=== |
− | XSL, f.1, 3.6.3
| + | :If errors severe enough to cause misunderstanding are discovered too late for correction prior to the distribution of a report, send an errata sheet or update that identifies the report and the error(s) to initial and subsequent recipients. |
| | | |
− | See also digital format; DTD; XML
| + | :;Non-print-specific |
| + | ::When errors are corrected in a digital environment, notice of the version being accessed should be included in the metadata. |
| | | |
| + | ==Glossary== |
| + | *[[Administrative metadata]]. [[Administrative metadata]] support maintaining and archiving reports and ensure their long-term availability. [[Administrative metadata]] are needed for migration of data from one format to another and contain rights information used for access control. Such metadata include type and version of software used in preparing the report and rights-management requirements. See also: Rights metadata |
| + | *[[Americans with Disabilities Act]] ([[ADA]]). Public Law 101- 336, 101st Congress, enacted July 26, 1990. The ADA prohibits discrimination and ensures equal opportunity for persons with disabilities in employment, state and local government services, public accommodations, commercial facilities, and transportation. See also: Section 508 |
| + | *[[Best practice]]. Guide and documentation to describe and standardize the use of processes that best support a community's needs. |
| + | *[[Data element]]. A discrete component of data or metadata. |
| + | *[[Descriptive metadata]]. Metadata that are used for the indexing, discovery, and identification of a resource. |
| + | *[[Digital document]]. "Digital document definition: where the view of a document version relevant for the requirements of one (of possibly multiple alternative) applications is represented using a digital representation format, such as a digital file." (ISO 10303, Industrial Automation Systems and Integration) |
| + | *[[Digital Object Identifier]] ([[DOI|DOI®]]). A DOI (Digital Object Identifier) is a persistent identifier given to a Web file or other Internet document so that if its Internet address changes, users will be redirected to its new address. The DOI is an implementation of the CNRI Handle System®, in which the term "DOI" is used instead of "Handle" to describe the identifiers. DOI syntax is defined in ANSI/NISO Z39.84. See also: Uniform Resource Name (URN) |
| + | *[[Document-Type Definition]] (DTD). In SGML or XML, a formal description of the components of a specific document or class of documents. DTDs provide a formal grammar used for machine processing (parsing) of documents expressed in SGML or XML. A DTD description includes: the containers or elements that make up the document (for example, paragraphs, headings, list items, figures, tables, etc.); the logical structure of the document (for example, chapters containing sections, etc.); additional information associated with elements -- known as attributes (for example, identifiers, date stamps, etc.). |
| + | *[[Dublin Core]]. The Dublin Core Metadata Element Set is a set of 15 descriptive semantic definitions that represents a core set of elements likely to be useful across a broad range of disciplines. [[Dublin Core]] metadata supplement existing methods for searching and indexing Web-based metadata, regardless of whether the corresponding resource is an electronic document or a "real" physical object. Described in ANSI/NISO Z39.85. |
| + | *[[extensible Markup Language]]. See [[XML]] |
| + | *[[extensible Stylesheet Language]]. See [[XSL]] |
| + | *[[Ingest]]. The external interface that accepts information into an archive. This process may include staging information to prepare for full acceptance, confirmation of receipt, and validation. OAIS contains the services and functions that accept Submission Information Packages from Producers, prepares Archival Information Packages for storage, and ensures that Archival Information Packages and their supporting Descriptive Information become established. Accession (traditional archives) = Ingest |
| + | *[[International Standard Book Number]] (ISBN). The International Standard Book Number (ISBN) uniquely identifies books and book-like products published internationally. Every ISBN consists of a set number of digits (ten prior to a revision in 2004), and whenever it is printed it is preceded by the letters ISBN. The number is divided into four parts of variable length, each part separated by a hyphen. Described in ISO 2108. |
| + | *[[International Standard Serial Number]] (ISSN). The International Standard Serial Number (ISSN) uniquely identifies a serial title regardless of language or country in which it is published. An ISSN is eight digits long and always displayed this way: ISSN 1234-5679. The first seven digits serve as the title number and the eighth is a check digit, which provides an efficient means for discovering transcription errors. Described in ISO 3297 and ANSI/NISO Z39.9. |
| + | *[[MARC 21]]. MARC is the acronym for MAchine-Readable Cataloging. It defines a data format that emerged from a Library of Congress led initiative begun thirty years ago. MARC became USMARC in the 1980s and MARC 21 in the late 1990s. It provides the mechanism by which computers exchange, use, and interpret bibliographic information and its data elements make up the foundation of most library catalogs used today. |
| + | *[[Metadata]]. Literally, "data about data," metadata include data associated with either an information system or an information object for purposes of description, administration, legal requirements, technical functionality, use and usage, and preservation. See also: [[Administrative metadata]], [[Descriptive metadata]], Preservation metadata, Rights metadata, [[Structural metadata]], Technical metadata, Use metadata |
| + | *[[Multimedia]]. Materials, documents, or products, such as World Wide Web pages, or components of digital libraries, archival information systems, and virtual museums that use any combination of text, numeric data, still and moving images, animation, sound, and graphics. |
| + | *[[Open Archival Information System]] (OAIS). The Open Archival Information System (OAIS ) reference model is a conceptual framework for an archival system dedicated to preserving and maintaining access to digital information over the long term. The reference model increases awareness and understanding of concepts relevant for archiving digital objects, especially among nonarchival institutions; elucidate terminology and concepts for describing and comparing data models and archival architectures; expand consensus on the elements and processes endemic to digital information preservation and access; and create a framework to guide the identification and development of standards. Described in: http://public.ccsds.org/publications/archive/650x0b1.pdf |
| + | *[[Preservation metadata]]. Metadata related to the preservation management of information resources, for example, metadata used to document, or created as a result of, preservation processes performed on information resources. |
| + | *[[Rights metadata]]. A form of [[administrative metadata]] dealing with rights management statements, including ownership statements, licenses, permissions, etc. |
| + | *[[Section 508]]. Section 508 refers to a statutory section in the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (found at 29 U.S.C. 794d). Congress significantly strengthened section 508 in the Workforce Investment Act of 1998. Its primary purpose is to provide access to and use of Federal executive agencies’ electronic and information technology (EIT) by individuals with disabilities. The statutory language of Section 508 can be found at http://www.section508.gov/ . The Access Board http://www.access-board.gov wrote the Section 508 standards and is the U.S. federal agency responsible for developing and enforcing accessibility requirements. See also: Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) |
| + | *[[Structural metadata]]. Information used to display and navigate digital resources; also includes information on the internal organization of the digital resource. Structural metadata might include information such as the structural divisions of a resource (that is, chapters in a book) or sub-object relationships (such as individual diary entries in a diary section). |
| + | *[[Style Sheets]]. Style sheets describe how documents are presented on screens, in print, or perhaps how they are pronounced. By attaching style sheets to structured documents on the Web (for example XML), authors/creators and readers can influence the presentation of documents without sacrificing device-independence or adding new XML tags. See also: XSL |
| + | *[[Technical metadata]]. Metadata created for, or generated by, a computer system, relating to how the system or its content behaves or needs to be processed. |
| + | *[[Uniform Resource Name]] (URN). Also referred to as "Universal Resource Name/Number." A unique, location-independent identifier of a file available on the Internet. The file remains accessible by its URN regardless of changes that might occur in its host and directory path. For information about Internet addressing, Described in: http://www.w3.org/Addressing/Addressing.html . See also: Digital Object Identifier (DOI®) |
| + | *[[Use metadata]]. Metadata, generally automatically created by the computer, that relate to the level and type of use of an information system. |
| + | *[[USMARC]]. See: MARC 21 |
| + | *[[XML]]. XML is extensible Markup Language, a project of the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C): the development of the specification is being supervised by their XML Working Group. It is designed to improve the functionality of the Web by providing more flexible and adaptable information identification. It is called extensible because it is not a fixed format like HTML (a single, predefined markup language). Instead, XML is actually a metalanguage—a language for describing other languages—which allows customized markup languages for limitless different types of objects. XML can do this because it's written in SGML (ISO 8879), the international standard metalanguage for text markup systems. |
| + | *[[XSL]]. XSL (extensible Stylesheet Language) is a language for expressing stylesheets for XML objects. It consists of two parts: a language for transforming XML objects, and an XML vocabulary for specifying formatting semantics. The originality and power of XSL is more general than just describing how XML items should be presented; it allows, as well as describes, how these objects can be transformed into other objects. The part of XSL dealing with document transformation is called XSLT. The part of XSL dealing with formatting objects is called XSL-FO. XSL and XSLT are currently working drafts of the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). |
| | | |
− | Page 84
| + | [[Category:Reference Books]] |